G R A M M A R - Forgotten Books
321
-
Upload
khangminh22 -
Category
Documents
-
view
0 -
download
0
Transcript of G R A M M A R - Forgotten Books
G R AM M A R
THE HINDUSTANI LANGUAGEIN THE
OR IENTAL AND
W ITH‘
NUM ER OUS COPPER -PLATE I LLUSTR ATION S OF TH E PER S IAN AND DEVANRGAR I
SYSTEM S OF ALPHAB ETIC W R ITING .
TO W H ICH "
I S A DDED ,
Q al umnae gamma of (may mutants fut: a waiting,
I N TH E
PER SI -ARAB IC DEVANAGAR I OM B S,
FOR M ING A COM PLETE INTR ODUCTION TO‘
THE B AGH -O - BAHAR
TOGETHER W ITH
A V OCAB‘
ULA R Y , AND EXP LA N A T O R Y N OT E S .
B Y DUNCAN FOR B ES, A .M . ,
Member of the R oyal Asiatic Somety of Great Britain and I reland ; M ember of th e Asza l zcSociety of Paris and P rofessor of Orien ta l Langu ages and Li teratu re
in King’s College, London .
an that ttaucllctt) mto a country betote be tum) att tuttattcc mto the itanguage.north t o school , ant] not t o trabel . ~ B acon.
L O N D O N
W M . H . A L L E N Co . ,
B OOKSELLE R S TO TH E HONOUR A B LE EA ST - IND IA COM PANY ,
7 , LEADENHALL STR EET
Prm ted b y J . «Sc H . COX, B R OTH E R S , 74 a: 75 , GreatQu een Street.Lincoln'
s-Inn F ields.
JAMES WEIR HOGG, ESQ, M.P CHAIRMAN,
HENRY ST. GEORGE TUCKER ,ESQ, DEPUTYCHAIRMAN,
AND
THE DI R ECTOR S,
awe imm u tab le the Qafitsfinh ta QIompatw ,
THE FOLLOW ING W O R K,
INTENDED
TO FAC IL ITATE THE A CQUI S ITI ON OF TH E H INDUSTAN I LANGUAGE ,
R E SPECTFULLY DED I CATED,
B Y TH E I R MOST O B ED IENT
AND FA ITHFUL SE R VANT
DUNCAN FOR B ES.
20th Ap ri l, 1846 .
P R EFACE.
TH E follow ing w ork has b een compiled w ith a vie w to enableevery one proceeding to India to acqu ire a fair know ledge of
th e m ost u sefu l and most extensively spoken langu age of thatcou ntry . Of late years, a new aera may b e said to have com
menced w ith regard to th e study of th e Hindu stani langu ageit be ing now imperative on every j u nior officer 1n th e Company
’
s
service,to pass an exam ination in that langu age before h e can
be deemed qu alified to command a tr00p, or to hold any staffappointm ent .Su ch being th e case , it is desirab le that every facility shou ld
be afforded to young men destined for India to acqu ire at leastan e lementary know ledge of Hindu stani in this cou ntry, so as
to be ab le to prosecu te th e stu dy during th e voyage . That manyof those w h o go ou t
,do not
,b efore their departure, study a lan
guage of so m u ch importance to them in after life , is to bemainly attribu ted to th e very high price hitherto exacted for
elem entary b ooks. That b ooks of a reasonab le price are in de
m and is readily proved by th e fact that th e pub lishers of thisvolume have
,W ithin th e last tw o years, disposed of not few er
than fiv e hu ndred copies ofArnot’
s H industani Grammar, w ith
E xtractsfor reading and a Vocabu lary, edited by m e, and sold atth e m oderate sumof half a gu inea. During th e last six months,th e same pu blishers have disposed of fiv e ‘ hu ndred copies of mylittle w ork entitled th e H industani Manu a l . These facts clearly
v i P reface .
prove that the pu b lic are far from indifferent on th e score ofstudying th e langu age .
Mr. Arnot’s Grammar being ou t of print, it became a qu es
tion w hether to pub lish a new edition of it, w ith notes and addi
tions, or to compose an entirely new w ork . For m any reasons,
I have preferred th e latter alternative, as I shou ld thu s have anopportun ity of treating th e su bj ect in that manner w hich an ex
perience of tw enty years h as led m e to consider as th e best. Ihave m ade it my endeavou r
,therefore , to comprise w ithin a
volume of moderate siz e and price,m ore explicit and coPiou s
information . on th e grammatical principles of th e language thanw hat is fou nd in any w ork , large or small, yet pu b lished. Fromnot introdu cing any thing bu t w hat is really important
,
—fromhaving entirely om itted w hatever seemed of no valu e to th e
learner, and by bestow ing b u t brief notice u pon all su chsu bjects as are plain and self-evident, as form ing constitu ent partsof ou r ow n and other Eu ropean langu ages, I have reason totrust that I have not been altogether u nsu ccessfu l in my design .
Th e first section treats rather fu lly of th e elementary'
sounds
of th e langu age, and of all that is requ isite for reading and
pronou ncing correctly . Th e next three sections treat of th eparts of speech, to th e defining and explaining of w hich I havestrictly confined myself. I have carefu lly avoided m ixing u p
th e syn tax of th e langu age w ith that part of th e w ork w hich isand ou ght to be pu re ly etymological . Th e mode of j umblingth e syn tax w ith th e etymo logy, w hich prevails in m ost
grammars, I have alw ays looked u pon as highly preposterou s.
It is u tterly absu rd to embarrass th e '
student w ith a ru le ofsyn tax, at a stage of h is progress w here h e probab ly does notknow a doz en w ords of th e langu age .
P reface.
In'
th e ffirst- four. Sections (u p to .p . I . have generallyaccompan ied every Hindu stani w ord and phrase w ith th e pron unc iation in . R oman ch aracters, . in order that th e learner m ight{not be delayed too long in . acqu iring
'
th e essential e lementsof th e grammar, and a lso to g uard against h is c ontracting a
Wic iou s mode . of pronu nciation . When h e h as made himselfacqu ainted w ith . w h at is technical ly called th e accidence, thatis,th e declension of th e nou ns and pronou ns, and th e . conj u ga
tion of th e v erbs, . h e may, after a fe w verbal instru ctions respecting th e arrangem ent of w ords, proceed to read and translate a
few pages of th e S elections, by th e aid of th e ~Vocab u lary. Th isdone, h e may read over th e Grammar carefu lly from th e b egin
n ing, for in fact . th e Grammar and Selections mu tu ally assist
each other.
Section V . (from p . 92 to 135) treats of th e Syntax of th e
language . This is a portion of th e w ork,in w h ich, if I do not
greatly m istake , I have m ade m any improvem ents. I have beenparticu larly carefu l in explaining those pecu liarities of th e lan
gu age in th e u se of w hich I have observed learners m ost apt toerr, w hen trying to . translate English . into Hindu stani . I havealso
,in several instances, ventu red to d iffer from all my prede
c essors on certain important points, w hich of course " I have ju stified by an appeal to th e langu age itself.In th e sixth and last section, I have given a concise accou nt
o f th e Devanagari alphabet, togeth er ,w ith an explanation of
th e variou s plates accompanying th e w ork . Th e peru sal of th eplates w ill initiate th e student into th e mysteries of th e manu
script character, w hich is m u ch u sed in India,b oth in litho
graphed and printed w orks, to say nothing of num erou s produ ctions w hich still remain in manu script . When th e learner
is w ell grou nded in th e or printed character, h e'
sh ou ld,
as an exercise , endeavou r to w rite ou t th e . same in th e Ta ’l i lc,
or w ritten character. When h e h as attained some facility inw riting th e latter, h e w ill find.it a very profitab le exercise totranscribe th e variou s phrases, 86C . in th e H industani M anu a l,
from th e R oman character into choice Ta ’ l i lc, and at th e sam e
tim e comm it them to m emory, as directed in th e preface to thatsmall w ork .
In th e compilation of this volume,my greatest ob ligations are
du e to th e w orks of th e late Dr. Gilchrist, w hose fame , as th e
restorer and prime cu ltivator of th e H industan i langu age, w illlast, as h is friend Mir Amman h as it, “
w hile th e Ganga and
Jamuna flow dow nw ards.
” I have also availed myself of th eGrammars of th e R ev . Mr. Yeates, of Calcu tta, and of Mn
hammad Ibrahim,of B ombay . Last
,b u t not least, th e valu ab le
little Gramm ar by my friend Dr. B allantyne, of B enares, servedm e as a regu lar index of all that w as u sefu l in th e langu age .
Th e Grammar by th e late Mr. Arnot, thou gh intended for th e
groundw ork of th e present, I fou nd to b e too concise in genera lto answ ermy pu rpose . From all th ese I cheerfu lly acknow ledgeto have procu red materials, bu t th e design and stru ctu re, and
m u ch that is new and original in th e w ork, I c laim as
my o w n .
An elementary grammar of a langu age is incomplete w ithou ta certain portion of easy extracts
,accompanied by a su itab le
vocab u lary, and occasional notes explanatory of any obscu reor idiomatic phrases that may occur in th e text. This is th e
more essential in a grammar of th e H indu stani, becau se th e
ch arac ters and w ords, b eing totally d ifferent from ou r o w n, it is
necessary, though it may sound strange, to learn tire language
P reface .
to a certain extent before th e grammar can b e peru sed to“
any
advantage .
‘
As to th e u se of translations and other fallaciou saids, su ch asgiving th e English of each w ord as it occu rs at
th e bottom of th e page or elsew here , it is a m ethod deservedlyscou ted by all good teachers. On th e other hand , to pu t a
largedictionary in th e hands of a b eginner, is equ ally u selessit is asking of h im to perform a difficu lt w ork, w ith an instrum entso u nw ieldy as to b e b eyond h is strength .
In order to remedy these inconveniences, I have appended tothis Grammar a selection of easy compositions for reading,c ommencing w ith short sen tences. Th e w ords occurring in th e
extracts in th e Persi-Arab ic character, as far as page 30,together w ith all th e w ords in th e Hindi extracts, w ill be fou ndin th e .Vocabu lary, at th e end of w hich I have added a few
notes explanatory of difficu lt passages or pecu liarities of th e
lan guage, w ith references to th e page a nd paragraph of th e
Grammar w here further information may b e ob tained .
'
Th e extracts from page , 30 to th e end (p . are takenfrom th e Q irad Afroz , th e style of w hich is generally c on
sidered to be easy. and gracefu l . All th e w ords occu rring in
th ese w ill be found in my vocab u lary appended to th e B dg fit oB azaar, to w hich these Selections form an introdu ction . Th e
tw o w orks togethermake u p a complete cou rse of reading, suffi ’
cient for qu alifying any one to pass th e requ ired exam ination inthis departm ent . ’
In th e extracts from th e E ll irad Afroz , I h ave left off th eu se of th e jaz m
iexcept in very rare instances, in order that
th e student may grad ually learn ,to read w ithou t it ; and in like
manner th e v irama T is omitted in the last fiv e or six stories
rx .P r2jac'
e .
'of.the Hindi extracts . I have been carefu l, throughou t, to g ive;th e
’
essential short vow e ls, conv inced t hat w ithou t them the‘most
a ttentive learner w ill be apt. . to comm it m istakes in . pronuncia
tion . I have also inserted afigid . systemxof punctu ation, th esame as I shou ld h ave done i n th e editing of. . a Latin Classic.,There m ay be a few . individu als so thorou ghly
.
w edded to w hatis foolish . or defective, m erely b ecau se i t is '
old, as to fee lshocked at this inno vatign . -
«Th ey . w ill - triumphantly ask, w hat
is th e n se of pu nctu ation , w hen th e natives have none in theirmanu scripts ? I answ er,
—tl1e .u se is, simply u'
to facilitate, forb eginners, th e , acqu isition of a k now ledge of the langu age .
,When that is once attained, they. w ill - .find. no difficu lty in reading native w orks, thou gh u tterly. void
,not only ofpunctuation but
of. vow el- points. and oth er diacritical marks. This i s merely a
qu estion o f time hu ndred years ago. w e~
h ad no stops for
o ur b ooks in Eu rope, and th e . excellent m onks w h o h ad the
managem ent of these matters w ent ~ ou complacently w ithou tthem . B u t after all, it w as fo und that stops w ere an improvem ent
, and so they are admitted to be even in- th e East . Almostall th e books printed in India since th e b eginning of th e presentcentu ry have pu nctu ation ; and those w h o w ou ld make b e
ginners attempt to . translate from a strange language in a
strange character, w ithou t th e least clu e to th e beginning or end
of th e sentences, seem to have a marvellou s love for th e ab surd.
All Oriental as w ell as Eu ropean b ooks ought to have stopsth e om ission is a mere cloak for th e idleness or ignorance ofth e editor.
Having repeatedly in th e course of this w ork alluded to th e
B rig]; o B alai r, it may not be am iss here to draw th e reader’
s
P reface .
attention to th e importance of that entertaining and u sefu l w ork .
Th e follow ing is a copy of th e latest regu lations by th e IndianGovernment respecting th e
TE ST I N H I NDUSTAN I EXAM I NAT I ONS.
F ort W i lliam,M ag 3 1, l 844.
-Th e follow ing test havingbeen fixed for th e H indu stani exam ination of m ilitary officers
prescribed in G . O . of 9th Janu ary, 1837 , th e same is
pu b lished in General Orders for th e information of th e armyCandidates shal l be requ ired to read and translate correctly,
th e B rig]; o B alzar and th e B a itci l P aclzisi,th e former in th e
Persian and th e latter in th e Devanagari character ; and further,to m ake an intelligib le and accurate w ritten translation in to Hindu stani
, of an English passage in a n easy narrative style ; thistranslation to b e w ritten in a legib lehand in both th e Persian
and Devanagari characters.
A colloqu ial know ledge of Hindu stani b eing deemed an objectof primary importance , th e proficiency of a candidate w ill betested on that point before th e grant to h im of a certificate ofcompetency by th e exam iners.
”
58, BUR TON CR ESCENT,
’
April, 1846.
COR R ECT IONS.
I n th e Grammar.
Page 52 line 23 for shartiga read shartiya
56 last line b u t one,
marige marige.
Extracts inQP ersian Character.
9
Page 1 last line,for
28 line15
Page 1
12
16
Dev aniigari Ch aracter.
line 1 for M read
as
as}
2 Th e Alph abet.
th e Persian c harac ter ; I I . th e same in R oman c h a
rac ter ;‘
I I I . th e detached form of th e letters, w hic hshou ld b e learned first ; and . IV . th e correspondingEnglish letters. 0
T HE , HI NDUSTAN I A LP H A B ET .
W e are no t a w are o f any w o rd in Hindu stani beginning w ithth e
Of th e Alphabet.
Th e alphabe t here describ ed is u sed , m ore or less
modified , by all those nations w h o have adopted th ereligion of Mu hamm ad ; v iz . along th e north and eastof Afric a, in Tu rkey , Arab ia, and Persia , and b y th e
Mu salman portion of th e people of India and Ma
lac c a .
In pronou ncing th e nam es of th e letters (column let it b e
rem emb ered that th e vow els are to be u niform ly sou nded as
follow s -Th e unm arked a is alw ays short, as a in w oman,
adrift, Ste . ii is al w ays long , as a in w ar or art i is short,as in p in ; i is long, as in p o lice ; u is short
,as u in bu ll, p u ll,
8 m. ii is th e sam e sou nd lengthened, and pronou nced as u in
ru le, Si c . e is sou nded as ea in bear ; 0 is al w ays long, as in no
a i is pronou nced as a i in a isle and an is sounded as in Germanand I talian , or very nearly like ou r on in sound, or ow in co w .
2 . Perhaps th e b est m ode of learning th e alphab e tis, First , to w rite ou t several tim es th e de tached or
fu ll forms of th e le tters in co lumn 111 . Sec ondly, to
ob serve w hat c hanges (if any) these u ndergo , w henc om b ined in th e formation of w ords, as exh ib ited inc o lum n V . Lastly, to endeavo u r to transfer, in tothe ir correspond ing English le tters, th e w ords givenas exemplifications in c olum n VI .
a . I t m ay be observed that th e letters l, a, 3, £3,J , and
do not alter in shape , w hether initial, m edial, or final . Anotherpecu liarity w hich they have is
,that they never u nite w ith th e
letter follo w ing, to th e left ; hence , w hen th e last letter of a
w ord is preceded by any one of these , it m u st have th e detachedform
,column 111. Th e letters l: and L3
,in like m anner, do not
alter, b u t they alw ays u nite w ith th e letter follow ing on th e lefthand .
3 . I n th e forego ing tab le , m ost of th e charac tersare su ffi c ien tly represented by th e c orrespondingEnglish le tters : it w ill there fore b e necessary to
no tice on ly those w hose sou nds d iffer m ore or less
from o u r o w n .
P ow ers of th e Letters.
w Th e sou nd of this letter is softer and m ore dental thanthat of th e English t ; it corresponds w ith th e t of th e Gaelicdialects, or that of th e I talians in th e w ord sotto . I t representsth e Sanskrit Fl .g
”; This letter represents th e Sanskrit 2 ; its sou nd is m u ch
nearer that of th e English t than th e preceding. In pronou nc
ing it, th e tongu e is w ell tu rned u p tow ards th e roof Of th em ou th
,as in th e w ords tip ,
top .
is sou nded by th e Arabs like ou r i h hard, in th e w ordsth ick, th in ; b u t by th e Persians and Indians it is pronou ncedlike ou r 3 in th e w ords sick, sin .
EThis letter h as u niform ly th e sound of ou r ch in th e w ord
ch u rch .
C1s a very strong aspirate
,somew hat like ou r h in th e w ord
hau l, bu t u ttered by compressing th e low er mu scles of th e
throat .t
’ has a sou nd like th e ch in th e w ord loch , as pronou nced byth e Scotch and Irish , or th e final ch in th e Germ an w ordsschach and bu ch . This letter w ill b e represented in R oman
characters by M .
d is m u ch softer and m ore dental than th e English d ; itrepresents th e Sanskrit I ,
and corresponds w ith th e d of th e
Celtic dialects, and that of th e I talian and Spanish .
3 This letter represents th e Sanskrit Ts’ , and is very nearly th esam e as ou r ow n d . Th e tongu e, in pronou ncing it, shou ld bew ell tu rned u p tow ards th e roof of th e m ou th .
5 is properly sou nded (by th e Arab s) like ou r th soft, in th ew ords thy and th ine ; b u t in Persian and Hindu stani it isgenerally pronou nced like o ur 2 in z ea l.
J is un iform ly sou nded very distinctly, as th e French and
Germans pronounce it.f This letter is sou nded like th e preceding, only th e tip of th e
tongu e m u st b e tu rned u p tow ards th e roof of th e m ou th . It isvery mu ch akin to S
, w ith w hich it often interchanges or, m orestrictly speaking, in th e Devanagari th e same letter serves forboth . In printed books, one of them h as a dot u nder.
P ow ers of the Letters.
j is pronou nced like th e j of th e French, in th e w ord jour, orou r 7. in th e w ord a z ure . I t is of rare occu rrence .
u" In Arab ic this letter h as a stronger or m ore hissing
sou nd than ou r 3 . In Hindu stani, ho w ever, there is little or no
distinction b etw een it and U” w hich is like ou r ow n s.
u‘i is pronou nced by th e Arabs like a hard d or dh ; b u t in
Hindu stani it is sou nded like z .
la and l’
: These letters are sou nded in' Hindustani like w and
j , or very nearly so . Th e anom alou s letteri
w ill be noticedhereafter.
(1
Ch as a sou nd somew hat like g in th e German w ord sagen .
Ab ou t th e b anks of th e Tw eed , th e natives sou nd w hat theyfancy to b e th e letter r, very like th e Eastern 6
CThis sou nd
w ill b e represented in English letters by g it.L3 bears som e resemb lance to ou r 0 hard, in th e w ords ca lm
,
cup ; w ith this d ifference,that th e J is u ttered from th e low er
m u scles of th e throat .3 3 is sou nded like ou r g hard, in giv e, go ; never like ou r g
in gem, gentle.
c,at th e b eginning of a w ord or syllab le is sou nded like ou r
n in th e w ord now at th e end Of a w ord , w hen preceded by a
long vow el, it generally h as a nasa l sou nd, like th e French n,in
su ch w ords as mon and son , w here th e sound of th e n is scarcelyheard , its effect b eing to m ake th e preceding vow el com e throu ghth e nose . Th e same sound may also occu r in th e m iddle of a
w ord, as in th e French sans. In th e R om an character, th e
nasal sound ofu
w ill be indicated by ii .s is an aspirate
,like ou r h in h and, h eart bu t at th e end of
a w ord,if preceded by th e short vow el a (Fatha th e s h as
no sensib le sou nd; as in All.) dana , a grain ; in w hich case it isI t. )
calledfish
'
s”
gels h de-rnukh taf i , i.e .
,th e h obscure or imp er
cep tible . As this final h , then , is not sou nded in su ch cases, w eshall om it it entire ly in th e R om an character w henever w e haveo ccasmn to w rite su ch w ords as Ml.) ddna , Si c .
a . At th e end of w ords derived from Arab ic roots, th e final 3is sometimes marked w ith tw o dots thu s, A and
,in su ch cases,
Of th e P rimitiv e Vow els. 7
sou nded like th e letter CL: t. Th e Persians generally convertth e 2 into as ; bu t som etimes they leave it u naltered, and
frequ ently they om it th e tw o dots, in w hich case th e letter issou nded according to th e general ru le . Lastly, th e Hindu staniu su ally receives su ch w ords in w hatever form they may happento be u sed in Persian .
6. Th e letter a or g is frequ ently employed as a m ere aspiratein comb ination w ith th e letters L
1) ; w ,
d ) ; ‘
E’ E ;o,3,
and c f ; as in th e w ords lei ? p h a lei , tha, Sac . In su chcases th e learner m u st b e carefu l not to sou nd th e p h and th
as in English ; th e h is to b e sou nded separately, imm ediatelyafter its accompanying letter, as in th e compou nd w ords up -h i ll,
h ot-h ouse . In m ost printed books th e rou nd form of th e h(a and 4) is employed to denote th e aspirate of th e precedingletter, otherw ise th e form 4:
is u sed bu t this ru le does not applyto m anu scripts
,particu larly those w ritten before th e days of
Dr. Gilchrist .0 . Mu ch m ight have b een said in describing th e sounds of
several of th e letters b u t w e qu estion w hether th e learner w ou ldbe greatly benefited by a m ore detailed description . I t isdifficu lt
,if not impossib le, to give in w riting a correct idea of
th e m ere sou nd of a letter, u nless w e have one that correspondsw ith it in ou r o w n langu age . When this is not th e case , w e
can only have recou rse to su ch langu ages as happen to possessth e requ isite sou nd . It is possib le , how ever, that th e studentmay be as ignoran t of these langu ages as of H indu stani . I tclearly follow s
,then, as a general ru le, that th e correct sounds
of su ch letters as differ from ou r o w n m u st b e learned by theear—w e may say, by a good ear ; and, consequ ently, a longdescription is needless. This remark applies in particu lar toth e letters as, C’ t, o, Us , u é, a, J ,
and th e nasal w .
Of the P rimitiv e Vow els.
4 . In Hindu stani , as in many of th e Orien tal langu ages, th e prim itive vow els are three in numb er.
Theyare represen ted by three small marks or sym bols,
8 Of the P rimitiv e Vow els.
tw o of w hich are placed ab ove and one beneath th eletter after w h ich they are sou nded , as in th e fo llowing syllab les, a do , a di, and a du ; or sar, J
» sir,
and su r.
1 0 ’
a . Th e first 1s called as ”fatha (by th e Persians, z ahar),
and IS w ritten thu s, 3 over th e consonant to w hich it b elongs.
Its‘
sou nd is that of a short a,su ch as w e have in th e w ord
ca lamus, w hich is of Eastern origin , and of w hich th e first tw osyllab les or root
, ca lam or ha lam,are thu s w ritten
, In
su ch Oriental w ords as w e m ay have occasion to w rite in R om an
characters,th e a
,u nmarked , is u nderstood al w ays to represent
th e vow el fa tha , and to have no other sou nd than that of a inca lamus or ca lendar.
6. Th e second is called by th e Arabs hasra (by th e
Persians1 gJ
z er), and is thu s w ritten u nder th e consonantto w h ich it belongs. I ts sou nd is that of ou r short i in th ew ord sip and fi n, w hich in H indu stan i w ou ld be w rittenand
Us Th e u nmarked i , therefore, in th e course of thisI
w ork,is u nderstood to have th e sou nd of i in sip and fin
,in
all Oriental w ords w ritten in th e R oman character.
0 . Th e third is called by th e Arab s z amma or dhamma<5 ,
W, (by th e Persians, u i ‘ i p esh ,) w hich is thus w ritten
over its consonant . I ts sound is like that of ou r short i t in th ew ords pu ll and p ush , w hich in Hindu stani w ou ld be w ritten
J; and u bj: w e have also its tru e sou nd m th e English w ords
foot and h ood, w hich w ou ld b e w ritten $3 and Ab . W e shal laccordingly, m th e follow ing pages, represen t th e gamma by th e
u nmarked u, w hich in all Oriental w ords in th e R oman ch a
racter,is understood to have th e sound of u in p u ll and p ush
b u t never that of ou r u in su ch w ords as u se and perfume, or
su ch as u in sun and fu n .
10 Consonants— M ov eable and I nert.
necessary. Th e letter h as generally th e sou nd of ou r w in w e,
w ent ; b u t occasionally it h as th e sound of ou r v , w hich m u stb e determ ined by practice . Th e sou nd of th e consonant c; is
exactly ou r o w n y in you , yet, or th e German j in jener.
c . I t appears, then , that ' th e thirty-fiv e letters constitu tingth e Hindu stani alphabet are all to be considered as consonants,
each of w hich m ay b e u ttered w ith any of th e three prim itive1 9
vow els, as l a , l i , and l u ; u ba, u bi, and a,» bu , g5m
hence th e elementary sounds of th e langu age am ou nt to onehundred and fiv e in number
,each consonant forming three dis
tinct syllab les.
6 . W hen a c onsonan t is ac com panied by one ofu / I f
th e three prim itive vo w els, it 1s sad to b e 515“ mu
tabarrik, that is, mov ing , or mov eable, by that v ow el .
Orien tal grammarians consider a syllab le as a step or
mov e in th e formation of a w ord or sen tence . W hen ,
in th e m iddle or end of a w ord , a consonan t is not
ac compan ied by a vo w e l , it is said to b eugh“ sa
'
h in,
resting or inert, and th en it is m arked w ith th e symb ol
1 or called jasm , w h ich sign ifies am pu tationor c u tting short . Thu s in th e w ord
(“if
mardum,
th e mim is mov eable byfath a ; th e re is inert,* having
no vo w el ; th e dirt is m oveab le b y z amma and , finally ,
7 )
3“Th e term inert is here em ployed fo r w ant o f a b e tte r. I n
m o st Arab ic,Pe rsian , and H indu stani Grammars
, a le tte r no t fo l
lo w ed by a v o w e l is c alled qu iescent, w hich is o bje c tio nable , as it
is apt to m islead th e beg inne r, th e te rm qu iescent be ing alre adyapplied in th e English Gramm ar in th e sense o f not so u nded. Fo r
instance, th e le tte r g is qu iescent in th e w o rd p h legm w e c anno t,ho w eve r, say that m 18 qu iescent in th e sam e w o rd
,tho u gh w e
m ay say that it is inert. Th e stu de nt w ill b e ple ased to be ar inm ind, th en , that a le tte r is said to b e inert w hen it is no t fo llo w edby a vo w el .
Consonants dou bled— Long Vow els. 1 1
th e mm is inert. As a general ru le , th e last letter of
a w ord is inert, and in that c ase th e markjasm is
u nnecessary .
7 . W hen a letter is dou b led , th e mark called
tashdid, is placed over it. Thu s, in th e w ord w as
sh id-dat, w he re th e first syllab le ends w ith o (d) andth e next b egins w ith o (d), instead of th e u su al m ode
/ 9
w est
, th e tw o drills are throw n into one , and th e mark
tashdid -
‘
f- indicates this c oalition . Th e stu den t m u stb e carefu l to u tter eac h of th e le tters thu s dou b led ,
d istinc tly— th e first le tterends th e preceding syllab le ,and th e sec ond b egins th e fo llo w ing ; they m u st no tb e slu rred over as w e do it, in su ch w ords as mummy ,
summer.
Of the Letters l, and 55 , v iew ed as Vow els or Letters
of Prolongation .
8 . Th e le tters and Lye, w hen inert, serve to
pro long th e preceding vow e l , as fo llow s. W hen i
inert is preceded by a letter m oveab le by fath a, th e
fath a and alif together form a long so und like ou r a in
w ar, or an in h au l, w hich in H indu stan i m ight b eWritten j, and JB . No w it so happens, that th e linert is alw ays prec eded byfath a : henc e , as a general
and prac tical ru le,alif not b eginning a w ord or syl
lab le forms a sou nd like o u r a in w ar, or an m h au l .
In th e R oman c harac ter, th e sou nd of long l w ill b e
represented by a, w hilst th e u nmarked a is alw aysu nderstood to represen t th e short primitive vow el
fatha .
9 . W hen th e letter,inert is preceded by a conso
nant m oveab le b y th e vo w el z amma , th e z amma and
toge ther form a sou nd like ou r 00 in tool ; w hich inH indu stani m ight be w ritten J}, or, w hich is th e
12 Long Vow els and D iph thongs.
same thing, like ou r u in ru le, w h ich m igh t b e w ritten
bl”
. Th e sam e comb ination forms also ano ther sou nd ,
like ou r 0 in mole, w hich w o u ld in th e same manner
b e w ritten dy e,or, perhaps still nearer, like ou r ou in
coat, w h ich m ight b e w ritten In th e Arab ic
langu age , th e latter sou nd of v iz . that of o in mole, isu nkno w n hence Arab ian grammarians c all itMajhul,or
’
Ajami , i .e . th e Unkno w n orPersian w hereas th eformer sou nd , that of u in ru le, is c alled M a
’
ruf , th e
Know n or Fam iliar If th e le tter,b e preceded by
a c onsonant m o v eab le byfatha , th e fath a and u n itedw ill form a diph thong , n early like o ur on in sound, or
ow in tow n , b u t m ore exac tly like th e an in th e
German w ord haum , w h ich in H indu stan i m ight b ew ritten
f‘fi
g' In th e follo w ing pages th e M a
’
rufso u nd w ill b e represented by u ; th e M ajh ul by 0 , andth e diphthong by o u . I f th e b e prec eded by th e
v ow e l hasra ,no u nion takes plac e , and th e , preserves
its natu ral sou nd as a c onsonant , as in th e w ord
si w a .
b . W hen th e letter is preceded by C (moveable by fa tha),and follow ed by l, th e sou nd of is scarcely perceptib le ; as
in th e w ord Ziljsé pronou nced Zgh jh , not kh a w c
'
zh . This ru le, h o w
ever, applies only to w ords pu rely Persian .
10 . W hen th e letterg ;inert is prec eded by a c onso
nan t m oveab le b y hasra , th e hasra and th eg ;
u nite ,
and form a long vo w e l , l ike o u r ee in feel, w hich inH indu stan i m ight be w ritten J: ; or, w hich is th esam e thing , l ike o u r i in mach ine, w h ich m ight b ew ritten
UZLL. Th e sam e c omb ination may also forma sou nd like ou r ea in bear, w hich w ou ld be w ritten
or like th e French éin th e w ords téte and féte or
Long Vow els and D iph th ongs. 13
th e German 6 fo llow ed by h in th e w ords sehr, gelehrt.
In th e Arab ic langu age , th e latter sou nd of i s n u
kno w n : henc e , w hen th e forms th e sou nd of ea in
b ear, &c . , it is called Yae M ajh u l , or Yae’
Ajami , thatis, th e Unkno w n or Persian 1-
35 ; w hilst th e form er
so u nd —that of co in feel, or i in m ac hine— is c alled
Yc'
ie M a’
ruf , th e Kno w n o r Fam iliar d . W hen th ele tter J inert is preceded by a c onsonan t
,m oveab le
by fath a , th e fatha and th e u n ite , and form a
d iphthong , like ai in th e German w ord Kaiser, w hichf ‘p /
in Arab ic , Persian , and H indu stan i , is w rittenfa n .
Th is sou nd is really that of ou r o w n i in w ise, siz e,
w hich w e are pleased to call a vo w e l , b u t w h ich , inreality , is a genu ine d iphthong . W hen th e le tter L
5
is prec eded by z amma , no u n i on takes place , and th eg ;
re tains its u su al sou nd as a consonan t , as in th e
w ord muyassar. Lastly , if th e letter 9 ‘ b e follo w ed
b y a vow e l , th e ab o v e ru les do not hold ; and th e isI
to b e sou nded as a consonan t , as in th e w ordsuh :
bayan , andul’)z zyan , not baz an and z i - an , to repre
sen t w hich lattersou nds th e m ark hamz a (No . 15) w ou ld
b e requ isite . A sim ilar ru le applies to th e
a . I t m u st b e ob served , that there are very fe w Hindu staniw orks
,prin ted or m anu script, in w hich all th e vow els are
m arked as w e have j u st described ; th e prim itive short vow elsbeing almost alw ays om itted, as w ell as th e marks -
ja z mand tashd i d . This om ission occasions no seriou s inconv e
niemce to th e natives, or to those w h o know th e langu age .
To th e you ng beginner, how ever, in this cou ntry, it is essentialto comm ence w ith books having th e vow els carefu lly m arkedotherw ise, h e w ill contract a viciou s m ode of pronu nciation
,
w hich h e w ill find it diffi cu lt afterw ards to u nlearn . At th e
sam e time , it is no easy m atter in printing to insert all th e
vow el-m arks, &c . in a proper and accu rate manner. In th e
present w ork, a med ium w ill be observed , w hich , w ithou t over
14 Practical R u les.
crow ding th e text w ith symb ols, w ill su ffi ce to enab le th e learnerto read w ithou t any error, provided h e w ill attend to th e follow ingru les.
1 1 . Th e short vo w el fatha is of more frequ en to ccu rrence than th e o ther tw o : hence it is om itted inth e printing ; and th e learner is to su pply it for everyc onsonant except th e last, provided h e see no o therv ow el , nor th e m ark jasm , nor th e e bu tterfly form of
th e le tter h e (par. 3 , b), accompanying any of th e
consonants aforesaid .
a . Th e letterJ at th e b eginning of a w ord or syllab le is a
consonant, and generally sou nded like our w , as in th e w ordsw ) w is, 0 c
w atan . When follow s a consonant that h as no
vo w el -m ark orjaz m accompanymg it, th e h as th e sou nd of 0
long, as in th e w ords 1“ so , jg h o . When th e consonant preceding
th e h as th e m ark z amma -i over it, th e h as th e sou nd of u
I
in ru le, or 00 in foo l, as in th e w ords y.» 317 or soo, and kit or
h oo and if th e preceding consonant h as th e vow el mark fa thaI
L over it, th e forms th e d iphthong au , as y.» su n or sow , J
S
lcau or co w .
b . Th e letter h“5 at th e b eginning of a w ord or syllab le is a
consonant like ou r letter y, as in ‘
tt'. yih , d b
. yiid . When th e
letter H5 is m edial or final,if th e consonant preceding it h as no
vow el -mark orjaz m,th e is sounded like ea in bear
, or a i in
fa i l, as in th e w ordsI" ber, and
J ,» ser. I f th e consonant
preceding th e h as th e m ark kasra T u nder it, th e H; h as
th e sound of i in mach ine, or ee infeel, as I f bir or beer, and
si r or seer and if th e preceding consonant h as th e mark
fatha over it,th e d form s th e diphthong o i
,asJ" ba ir or
byre, and fl . ) sair or sire .
0 . There are a few instances in w hich th e letters 3 and
u nite w ith th e preceding consonan t , as in th e w ords f l)“ sw ami
,
and L5 hya; b u t su ch comb inations b eing of comparativelyrare occurrence, they may safely be left to th e student’s o w n
Examples of Vow els— Medial or Final . 15
practice . Lastly, in a few Arab ic w ords th e final d occu rs0 .
w ith an l a lif w ritten over it, in w hich case th e l only is0 7
sounded, as in th e w ordsAsa ;’
u lcbc'
i ASllaB'
ta’
ala'
t.
12 . W e shall no w at one v ie w exh ib it th e prac ticalappl ication of th e princ iples treated of in th e prec edingparagraphs. Th e vow e ls in Hindu stan i, as th e stu den tmay have ere no w perc e ived , are ten in n umb er, th e
m anner of representing w h ich m ay b e seen in th e
fo llo w ing ten w ords. Th e u pper line (1) c ontains tenEnglish w ords in c omm on u se , in each of w h ic hoc c urs th e c orresponding so u nd of th e H indu stan iw ord b eneath . Th e low er (3) line shew s th e m ode
in w hich th e Orien tal vo w e ls w ill b e u n iform ly re
presen ted in R oman charac ters in th e cou rse of thisw ork .
1 . fun fin foot fa ll foal foo l fow l ,fai l feel file
I f
3 . fan fin fu t fdl fo l f il l fau l fel f i l fdil
13 . W e have no w , w e tru st , fu lly explained h o'
v‘
v
th e vow e ls are to b e represented w hen they follow an
au d ib le c onsonan t , su ch as th e le tter f in th e foregoing list of w ords. In order to represen t th e vow e ls
as in itial or c ommenc ing a w ord , it w ill at once oc c u r
to th e stu den t that w e have mere ly to ann ihilate or
w ithdraw th e letter m i from th e ab ove w ords, leav ingevery thing else as it stands, and th e obj ec t is effec ted .
This is prec isely w hat w e do in reality ,thou gh not in
appearance. Th e Arab ian grammarians have taken intothe ir heads a most su b tle cro tche t on this poin t , w hic his, th at no w ord orsyllable can begin w ith a v ow el . Therefore , to represent w hat w e call an initial vow el , th at is,
a vo w el c omm enc ing a w ord or syllab le , they employth e le tter l alif as a fu lcrum for th e vow el . W e havealready stated (No . 5) that they c onsider. th e l as a
very w eak aspirate or sp iritus lenis ; hence its presence
16 I nitial Vow els.
su pports th e theory, at least to th e eye , if not to th e
ear. In order, then , to exhib it th e vo w e ls in th e
preceding paragraph as initial , w e m u st, after takingaw ay th e le tter a s su b stitu te l in its p lace , w h ich lb e ing noth ing , or v ery nearly so , th e process am ou n ts inreality to th e w ithdraw al of th e le tter _5f , and th e
su b stitu tion of w hat may b e considered asm ere noth ing ,
thu s1 . u n in oo t a ll at 551 ow l a i l eel a isle
2 . ml ul w t Jll djl J,l J,l on mi
3 . an in [i i o l il l a u l el i i a il
Instead of w riting tw o alifs at th e b eginn ing of a
w ord , as in Jll at, it is u su al (exc ept in Dic tionaries)to w rite one alif w ith th e o therc u rv ed o verit thu s, AT.
This symb o l 3 ; is c alled 8M mudda , extension ,
”
and
d enotes that th e alif is sou nded long, like ou r a in
w ater. M . De Sac y (v . Grammaire Arabe, p . 7 2)considers th e mark madda to b e no thing e lse than a
1‘ m im , th e initial of th e w ord madda b u t ou r b u siness
is simply w ith its prac tic al u se , and th e reader if h e
pleases m ay vie w it as a c ontrac tion of o u r letter m ,
m ean ing make it long .
14 . I f instead of l w e su b stitu te th e le tteri ’ w e
shall have v irtu ally th e sam e sou nds, only that theym u st b e u ttered from th e low er m u sc les of th e throat ,thu s
db Jr‘ J) “ th e J»: Jss o le;
’
ii l’o l
’i¢l
’
a u l’
el’i l
’
a i l
a . I t appears,then , that w hen in Hindu stani, a w ord or syl
lab le b egins w ith w hat w e consider to b e a vow el , su ch w ord orsyllab le m u st have th e letter l or t to start w ith . Throughou tthis w ork, w hen w e have occasion to w rite su ch w ords in th e
R oman character, th e correspondingplace ofth e i w ill be indicatedby an apostrophe or sp iritus lenis thus, M ’
asal, ugh:’
&bid,
18 Letterspecu liarly Arabic , P ersian ,$0 .
gence , w here th e h amz a alone h as th e sou nd of th e
short i or e .
a . Th e sou nd of th e m ark hamz a , according to th e Arab iangrammarians, d iffers in some degree from th e letter l, b eing som ew hat akin to th e letter
a,w hich its shape 4: w ou ld seem to
w arran t ; bu t in Hindu stani this distinction is overlooked . W e
have here confined ou rse lves solely to th e practical u se of thissymbol as applied in Persian and Hindu stani for fu rther infor-rm ation on th e subj ect
,th e reader may consu lt De Sacy’
s Arab icGramm ar.
16 . B efore w e c onc lu de th e discu ssion of th e alphab et, it m ay be proper to inform th e stu dent that th ee ight letters, a» ,
t’ u
a , Us, lo , L3, 8 2 and 3 , are pecu liarto th e Arab ic ; henc e , as a general ru le , a w ord con
taining any one of these letters m ay b e considered.
as b orro w ed from th e Arab ic . . W ords c on taining any of th e letters t, or i : m ay b e Per
sian or Arab ic , b u t not of Ind ian origin . Th e few
w ords w hic h contain the letter j are pu rely Persian .
W ords containing any of th e le tters or 5, mayb e Persian or Indian , b u t not Arab ic . Lastly , w ords
c ontaining any of th e fou r- dotted letters (i n, 3, orj, are
pu rely Indian . Th e rest of th e letters are c omm on to
th e Arab ic , Pe rsian ,and H indu stan i langu ages.
17 . As w ords and phrases from th e Arab ic lan
gu age enter very freely into th e H indu stani , w e
canno t w e ll om it th e follo w ing remarks. Arab ic
nou ns have frequ en tly th e defin ite artic le Jl (th e) of
that langu age prefixed to them ; and if th e nou n
happens to b egin w ith any of th e thirteen le tters, an ,
an , n, «5, J , j , u " US
, u" : Us, la, 15, or u , th e J of th e
artic le assum es th e sou nd of th e initial letter of th efi -L ’
nou n , w hich is then marked w ith tashdid ; thu ss il th e
ligh t, pronou nced ou - nu r, not al-nur. B u t in theseinstances, althou gh th e J h as lost its ow n sou nd , it
mu st alw ays be w ritten in its ow n form . Of cou rse ,
Arabic Words and P hrases. 19
w hen th e no u n begins w ith J,th e J of th e artic le cc
l u g
inc ides w ith it in l ike m anner, as in th e w ords ilnll l al
lailot,“th e n ight ; and in this case th e J of th e
article is some tim es om itted , and th e initial lam of
th e nou n marked by tashdid, 3131ai- latlat.
a . Th e th irteen letters, an ,&c .
,ab ove m en tioned, together
w ith th e letterJ, are , by th e Arab ian gramm an ans called so lar0
or su nny letters, becau se th e w ord M sh ams,
th e su n ,”
happens to b egin w ith one of them . Th e other letters of th e
Arab ic alphab et are called lunar, b ecau se, w e presume, th ew ord
I“ kamar, th e moon
,
”begins w ith one of th e numb er,
or simply b ecau se they are not so lar. Of cou rse,th e captions
critic m ight find a thou sand equ ally valid reasons for callingthem by any other term ,
su ch as go ld and silv er, black and
blu e, Stc . bu t w e m erely state th e fact as w e find it.18 . In general , th e Arab ic nou ns of th e ab ove de
sc ription , w hen in trodu ced into th e Persian and
H indu stani langu ages, are in a state of c onstru etion w ith ano ther su bstantive or preposition w hic hprecedes them ; like ou r Latin term s
“jus gentium ,
“v is inerticefl
“av qfiicio ,
”
&c . In su ch cases, th e
last letter of th e first or govern ing w ord , if a su b stan
tiv e , is m oveab le by th e vow el z amma , w hich s ervesfor th e enu nc iation of th e l of th e artic le prefixed toth e sec ond w ord ; and , at th e sam e time ,
the l is marked
w ith th e symb ol 13 , c alled a; w asla, to denote su chu n ion ; as in th e w ords e l fl l Amir—u l-mumin in ,
Commander of th e Faithfu l ; 11,911Ju 1 I lcba
'
l- ud
dau la, Th e dignity of th e state .
a . Arab ic nou ns occasionally occu r h aving their final lettersmarked w ith th e sym bol called tanw in, w hich signifies th e u sing
of th e letterw
. Th e tanw i n, w hich in Arab ic grammarserves tom ark th e infiexions of a noun , is formed by dou b ling th e vow elpoint of th e last letter, w hich indicates at once its presence and
20 Numerical Value of th e Letters.
its sou nd ; thu s, u h bdbu n,g
o
a l} bdbin, b l: baban . Th e lastform requ ires th e letter l, w hich does not
,how ever, prolong th e
sound of th e final syllab le . The l is not requ ired w hen th e nou né / (n
fI
ends w ith a hamz a or th e letter 3 , as J.» sha i- an, <ZA§> h ik
matan ; or w hen th e w ord ends in d, ya , su rmounted by l (iné ?
w hich case th e l only 18 pronou nced), as l Nb h u dan . In Hin
du stani th e occu rrence of su ch w ords is not common, being4 ‘ (a
lim ited to a few adverb ial expressions, su ch as inc } hasdan ,
pu rposely,li li ll i ttifiilcan, by chance .
19 . W e may here m en tion , that th e tw enty e ightletters of th e Arab ic langu age are also u sed (c hiefly 1n
recording th e tarifi , or date of historical events, &c .
for th e pu rpose of num erical compu tation . Th e nu
m erical order of th e le tters d iffers from that given in
pages 2 and 3 , b e ing, in fac t , th e identical arrange
m ent of th e Hebre w alphab et , so far as th e latter ex
tends, v iz . to th e letter cu , 400 . Th e fo llow ing isth e order of th e num erical alphabe t w ith th e corre
sponding nu mb er plac ed ab ove each letter ; th e w ho leb eing grou ped in to e ight u nmeaning w ords, to serv e
as a memoria technica .
'
1
000
C CC C
tun a:
w here l deno tes one , u tw o , Ithree , n fou r, &0 .
a . In reckoning by th e preceding system ,th e seven letters
pecu liarly Persian or Indian,v iz . db
, E ’3, 5, j , and d ,
have th e same valu e as their cognate Arabic letters of w hichthey are m odifications
,that is
,of c u
, E ’ n, j , j , and 5 ,
respectively . Th e mode of record ing any event is, to form a
brief sen tence , su ch, that th e numerical valu es of all th e letters,w hen added together, am ou nt to th e year (of th e Hij ra) inw hich th e event took plac e . Thu s
,th e death of Ahli of Shi raz ,
w h o may be considered as th e last of th e classic poets of Persia ,
Of Dates.
happened in A.H . 942 (A.D . This date is recorded inth e sentence
u llil n) ; if }; fu d b i . e . Ahli w as th e king ofpoets ; w here th e sum of all th e letters be, a lif, dil l, 8Lc .
, w henadded together, w ill be found to amou nt to 942 . Th e following date, on th e death of th e renow n ed Hyder Ali of Maisur
is equ ally elegant, and m u ch more appropriate .
up ; w lglllg B“Th e spirit of B alaghat is gone .
b . Sometimes th e title of a hook is so cu nningly contrived as
to express th e date of its completion . Thu s,several letters
w ritten on variou s occasions by Ab u ’l-Faz l , su rnamed ’Allam '
i,
w hen secretary to th e Em perorAkbar, w ere afterw ards collectedinto one volume by ’
Abd us- sam ad, th e secretary’
s nephew ,and th e
w ork w as entitled$11; w mu h c’
itabdti a lliim'
i , Th e lettersof w hich at th e sam e time gives th e date of pu b lication , A.H . 1015. W e m ay also m en tion that th e best prosew ork in H indu stani—th e B dgjg
- o-B ah dr JLW. file, by Mi r
Amman, ofDelhi , w as so called m erely b ecau se th e nam e inclu des
th e date,th e discovery of w hich w e leave as an exercise to
th e stu dent .c . It is need less to add that th e m arks for th e short vow elscou n t as nothing ; also a letter marked w ith tashd i d, thou ghdou b le , is to be reckoned bu t once only
,as in th e w ord
w here th e ihm though dou b le cou nts on ly 30 . Th e Latinw riters of th e m iddle ages som etim es am u sed them selves bym aking verses of a sim ilar kind, althou gh they h ad only fi v e
num erical letters to cou n t w ith,v iz . 1 , v , x , D , and M . This
they called carmen eteostich on or chronostich on, ou t of w hichthe follow ing effu sion on th e restoration of Charles I I .
, 1660,
w ill serve as a specim en .
Cedant arma oleae , pa; regna serenat et agros.
SECTION I I .
Of th e Names (Mi l asmc'
i) including Su bstantiv es,
Adjectiv es, and P ronouns.
20 . Oriental grammarians, both Hindfi and Mu sal
man , reckon only three parts of Speech , v iz . th e nou n
(ms/s .
,harf ). Under th e term nou n , they inc lu de
su bstantives, adjec tives, pronou ns, infin itiv es of verb s,and partic iples. The ir verb agrees w ith ou r part of
speec h so nam ed ; and u nder th e general term of
partic le are c omprised adverbs, prepositions, c on
j u nc tions, and interj ec tions. Th e student w ill find itnecessary to b ear this in m ind w hen h e comes to read
or c onverse w ith native teachers ; in th e m ean w hilew e shall here treat of th e parts of Speech ac cord ingto th e c lassification ob served in th e b est Latin and
English grammars, w ith w h ich th e reader is su pposedto b e fam iliar.
Of th e Article.
2 1 . Th e H indu stan i , and all th e o ther langu ages of
India, so far as w e know , have no w ord c orrespondingexac tly w ith ou r artic les th e, a , or an ; these b e ingreally inheren t in th e nou n , as in Latin and Sanskrit .Henc e , as a general ru le , th e c ontext alone can determ ine w he ther, for exam ple , th e expression tin lS b l)ri
'
y'
ii ha beta,“regis filiu s,
”
m ay sign ify— a son of a
king , th e son of a king, a son of th e king, or th e
son of th e king . W hen , how ever, great prec ision is
requ ired , w e o ften mee t w ith th e dem onstrative prono u ns yih , th is, and w u h
,that , together w ith the ir
Genders of Nouns. 23
plu rals, employed in th e same sense as o u r defin iteartic le th e . Ou r indefinite artic le a or an is expressedin m any instances by th e n um eral C131 eh , one or byth e indefinite pronou n hf; hoi , some , a certain one ;
asfi’f
" d i d eh mard aur eh sh er, a m an and
a tiger ; b a g -31 koi Shali ls, som e person ; b u t of thisw e shall treat more fu lly in th e Syntax .
W J r) Of Su bstantiv es.
(1122 . Su b stan tives in H indu stani have tw o genders
o nly , th e m asc u line and fem inine ; tw o nu mb ers, th e
singu lar and plu ral ; and e ight cases, as in Sanskrit ,v iz . nom inative , genitive , dative , accu sative , ab lative ,
locative , instrum en tal or agen t , and vocative . Th e
ab lative , locativ e , and instrumental , c orrespond w ithth e Latin ab lative . I t h as b een deem ed proper hereto re tain th e Sanskrit c lassification of th e cases, in
ac c ordance w ith th e grammars of th e Mahratta, B engali, and o ther cognate Indian dialec ts.
23 . Gender.
—To th e m ere H indu stan i reader, it isdifficu lt , if not impossib le , to lay dow n any ru les byw hich th e gender of a lifeless nou n , or th e nam e of a
thing w ithou t sex, m ay b e at once ascertained . W ithregard to su b stantives that have a sexu al distinc tion ,
th e m atter is easy enou gh , and is pithily expressedin th e three first lines of ou r o ld school acqu aintance ,R u ddiman .
w e.
1 . Qu ae m anhu s sol iim tribu u ntu r, mascu la sun to .
2 . Esto femineum , qu od fem ina sola reposcit.
3 . Sit commu ne dufim,sexum qu od signat u trumqu e .
This m eans, in plain English , that all an imateb eings of th e male kind , and all names applic ab le tom ales only ,
are m asc u line . Fem ales, and all nam es
applicab le to females only , are fem inine ; and a fe w
24 Gender of I nanimate Ofiects.
w ords w hich mav b e applied to bo th sexes, may b e of
e ither gender, ac c ording to c irc umstancesa . To th e foregoing general ru les, there is one (perhaps th e
only)‘
exception . Th e w ord M h abi la , w hich literally m eans
tribe or fam ily, also denotes a w ife , and is u sed , even in this lastsense, as a m ascu line nou n . Thu s m th e B ag ii o
-B ah ar,p . 27
,
w e have th e expression Ll 4.7L,L557 w w «in 1
5uL"
habi le ho ba sabab muhabba t h e sath liya , ou t of affection Ibrou ght my w ife w ith m e
,
”
w here h abi la is inflected like a m asen
line nou n . This,how ever, is m ere ly an Orien tal m ode of expres
sion , it being u su al w ith th e people to employ th e terms h ouse or
fami ly, w hen alluding to their w ives. Ou r neighbou rs, th e
Germans,w ithou t any su ch excu se , have been pleased to deter
m ine that th e w ord w eib, w ife , shou ld be of th e neu ter gender.
24 . W ith regard to nou ns deno ting inanimate objec ts,th e practical ru le is, that those ending in i , an t,
andJ
. s ,h are generallyany o ther letter, are , for e ;
b u t as th e exc eptions are num ero u s, th e stu dent -m u sttru st greatly to and w hen in speaking h eh as any dou b ts respec ting th e gender of a w ord , it is
preferab le to u se th e m asc u line .
a . It is said that there is no general ru le w ithou t exception,and some have even gone so far as to assert that th e excep tionabsolu tely p rov es th e ru le. If this latter maxim w ere sou nd,nothing cou ld b e better estab lished than th e general ru le abovestated respecting th e gender of inanimate nouns. W e havegiven it, in sub stance, as laid dow n by Dr. Gilchrist, su cceedinggrammarians having added nothing thereto , if w e except th eR ev . Mr. Yates
,w h o in h is grammarh as appended , asan amend
m ent, a list of some tw elve or fifteen hu ndred exceptions. Thisw e have alw ays looked u pon as a m ere w aste of paper, believingas w e do that no memory can possib ly retain su ch a dry m ass of
u nconnected w ords. Th e fact is, that th e ru le or rather th elabyrinth , may b e considerab ly restricted by th e application of afew general principles w hich w e shall here state .
26 Number and Case.
th e additioh of th e term ination, ish , are fem inine . These
are not few in Hindu stani, and it is to su ch only that th e ru lestrictly applies. Nou ns from th e Persian
,or from th e Arab ic
throu gh th e Persian , ending in ' the w eak or imperceptib le s h,
su ch as MUnama , a letter, M 13 hi l’a , a fortress,‘
are generallymascu line . This again may be accou nted for by th e affinity ofth e final a to th e long a, w hich is a general mascu line terminationin Hindu stani .P rincip le 4th .
—P ure Ind ian w ords, that is, su ch as are not
traceab le to th e Arabic , Persian , or Sanskrit,
are generallym ascu line if they term inate in l 5 . Arab ic roots ending in l a,are for th e m ost part fem inine nouns pure ly Sanskrit ending in1 ii , are regu lated by Principle 1st, b u t w e m ay add, that th elong a b eing a fem inine term ination in that langu age , su ch w ordsare generally fem inine in Hindu stani . Words pu rely Persianw hen in troduced into Hindu stani
,w ith th e exception of those
ending in U'27 ish and 4 already m entioned, are not redu cib leto any ru le th e Persian langu age having no gender of its o w n
in th e gramm atical sense of th e term .
P rincip le 5th .
—Compou nd w ords, in w hich th e first m ember
m erely qualifies or defines th e last, follow th e gender of th e lastm emb er, as s
Jlifo sh ikiir-
gah , hu nting-
grou nd, w hich is fem inine ; th e w ord gah b eing fem inine , and th e first w ord sh ikar
qu alifying it like an adj ective .
b . It mu st h e confessed,in conclu sion , that, even after the
application of th e foregoing principles, there m u st still remain a
considerab le number of w ords redu cib le to no sort of ru le . Thisis th e ine v itab le fate of all such langu ages as hav e only tw o
genders. Another natu ral consequ ence is, that m any w ordsoccu r sometimes mascu line and sometim es fem inine , dependingon th e caprice or indifference of th e w riter or speaker. W e
have also good grou nds to believe that a w ord w hich is u sed inth e mascu line in one district m ay be fem inine in another, as w eknow from experience to b e th e case in Gaelic , w hich , like th eHindu stani, h as only tw o genders.
25 . Number and Case .-Th e mode in w h ich th e
.D eclension . 2 7
plu ral numb er is form ed from th e singu lar, w ill b e
b est learned b y inspec tion from th e exam ples w h ichw e here su bj o in . Th e langu age h as virtu ally b u t onedec lension , and th e v ario u s ob liqu e c ases, singu lar
and plu ral,are generally form ed by th e addition of
certain partic les orpost-positions, &c . , to th e nom inativ esingu lar. All th e su bstan tives of th e langu age m ay b e
very c onven iently redu c ed to three c lasses, as follo w s
Class I .
—Inclu ding all Substantives of th e Feminine Gender.
Singu lar.
un i)
rat,
US, gsl rat-ha ,
V
-ke, Jet,
au l)
rattled,“
au l)
rat,
f rat- ho, J
L5.» m l
)rat-se
,
I f. W m l) rat-men, -
par,
Us rat- no,
m l) 4 1 ai rat,
Plu ral .
Nom inatlv e0
‘ l raten,
th e n ightsGenitive J 0
5 lsUP ) raton-hé, -ke,
- h i, of th e nights
Dative jgw f l) rdton-h o , to th e nights
Accu sative u cil) ”
it”? I th e n ights
jgw y ly raton -ko, f
Ab lativeL5
.»w f
’
l) riiton-se, from th e n ights
LocativeI f. u
.» raton-men, -
p ar, in, on , th e nightsAgent U
su f lj raton-no
,by th e nights
Vocative Jill) q l a i rato, 0 nights.
Femmm e nouns ending in}; i , add
.
ul an in th e nom inative
plu ral ; thu s roti , bread, a loaf,nom . plu r.
u .
a
” rotiyan.
In th e ob liqu e cases plural , theyadd w on as above .
In like manner a few w ords i n , u,add an
,asJJy yoru , a
w ife, ri om . plur. joru w an orJarn,an .
28 D eclension .
a . W e may no w take a brief view of th e form ation of th ecases. I t w ill be seen that in th e singu lar, th e ob liqu e casesare formed directly from th e nom inative , w hich remains nu
changed , by th e additionl
of th e variou s post—positions. Th e
genitive case h as three forms of th e post - position,all of them
,
how ever, having th e same signification , th e choice to be determ ined by a very Simple ru le w hich b elongs to th e syn tax . Th e
accu sative is either like th e nom inative or like th e dative , th echoice
,in many instances, depending on circum stances w hich w ill
be m entioned hereafter. Th e nom inative plu ral adds en to thesingu lar (an if th e singu lar be in i). Th e ob liqu e cases pl uralin th e first place add on to th e singu lar, and to that they affixth e variou s post-positions it w ill b e observed that th e accu sativeplu ral is either like th e nom inative or dative plu ral . Th e vocative plu ral is al w ays formed by dropping th e final n of th eob liqu e cases. Let it also b e rem emb ered that th e final
u
added in th e formation of th e cases of th e plu ral numb er isalw ays nasal . Vide letter u ,
page 6 .
Class I I .—Inclu ding all Mascu line Nou ns, w ith th e exception ofsu ch as end in l a(pu rely Indian), u i an, and s a .
Example, mard , m an .
Singu lar. P lu ral .mard, man nja mard , m en
VSJ Kn} mard ha, 8Lc . , u
'gLSsKw n}:
1
of man
w
ofm en
D . mard ho,toman
jg mardou ho , to
m en
mard ,'
1 § ao mard, 1 8
l mard ko,jman
jgw jojflo mardori h o, .l 8
u“ {no mard so, from mardou se
,from
m an m en
L .
I 3Mmard menp ar, Ji u“
u J‘S‘ mardonmenp ar,
m,on , m an i n
, on , m en
Ag .
61 use mard ne
,bym an
L; u jtgw mardori M , by
m en ~
ai mard,O m an JASd 55
1 a i mardo, 0
men .
D eclension . 29
This class, throu ghou t th e singu lar, is exactly like class I . ,
and in th e plu ral , th e only difference consists in th e absence of
any t erm ination added to th e nom inative and consequ ently toth e first form of th e accu sative
, w hich is th e sam e .
All th e other cases in th e plu ral are formed precisely as
b efore . It m u st b e adm itted that th e w ant of a distinct term ination to distingu ish th e nom inative plu ral from th e singu lar ‘ is a
defect in m ascu line nou ns. This, how ever, seldom occasions anyam bigu ity , th e sense b eing qu ite obviou s from th e context . Th e
German is liab le to a sim ilar charge , and sometim es even th e
English , in th e u se of su ch w ords as deer, sh eep ,and a fe w
others.
Class I I I . - Including Mascu line Nouns pu rely Indian endingin l a, a few ending in v
i an, and several w ords, chiefly fromth e Persian , ending in th e imperceptib le or short a .
Example,8 ku tta, a dog .
Singu lar.
ku tta'
, a dog
ku tte hd, &c .
,
of a dogD .
,5 ku tte h o, to a
dog
h u tta'
,
h u tte ho,
ku tte so, from a
dog
ku tte men p ar,
in,on
,a dog
h u tte no, by a
dogI
ai h u tte, 0 dog
ku tte, dogsh u tton ha
, Sta ,
of dogsh u tton 150 , todogs
w ?
ku tte, w .
8”h u ttonho
,
”5
h u ttonse,from
dogsku ttonmenp ar,
in, on , dogs
ku tton no, by
dogsai h u tto,O dogs. .
30 D eclension .
a . In like mannermay h e declined many w ords ending in a, as
(0
8M banda , a slave, gen . bande ha, SLc .,nom . plu r. bande,
slaves, gen . bandor‘
i ha, Ste . Nou ns in at are not very num erou s, and as th e final nis very little if at all sou nded
,it is often
om itted in w riting ; thu s u h“? baniyan or Lnn baniya, a trader,gen . baniyenh a or baniyo kit, w hich last is th e m ore common .
In th e ordinal numbers, su ch as u h “ dasw an,th e tenth
, Scc .,
(n
th e nasal n generally remains in th e inflection , asany
.) dasw en
hd, &c .
, of th e tenth . In th e ob liqu e cases plu ral, th e u i an,is changed into C), on. With regard to this third class of w ords,w e have one m ore remark to add, w hich is
,that th e vocative
singu lar is often to b e m et w ith u ninflected,like
/
th e nom inative .
b . Th e pecu liarity of class I I I . is, that th e term inations l aand d a
,of th e nom inative singu lar, are entirely d isplaced in th e
ob liqu e cases singu lar and nom inative plural by 149 e, and in th e
ob liqu e cases plural by w ,on. This change or displacem ent of
term ination is called inflection, and it is lim ited to m ascu linenou ns only w ith th e above term inations ; for fem in ines ending in1, vi, or a, are never inflected, nor are all mascu lines ending in
th e same , su bj ect to it. A considerab le numb er of mascu linenou ns ending in l a, pu rely Arab ic , Persian, or Sanskrit, are not
inflected , and consequ ently belong to class I I . On th e otherhand
,m ascu line nou ns pu rely Indian , su ch for example as th e
infinitiv es and participles of verbs u sed substantively, are u ni
form ly su bj ect to inflection . In like m anner, several m ascu linenou ns ending in th e imperceptib le at are not su bject to inflection ,and as these are not redu cib le to any ru le , th e stu dent m u st b egu ided by practice .
0 . Mascu lines in 5. from th e Persian often change th e a; into io b
in Hindu stan i ; thu s awn darja , grade , rank, becom es by.)
darja so 294 ma z a,taste , li e maz a. All su ch w ords are
su bj ect to inflection,for by this change th ey becom e as it w ere
I ndianiz ed . Th e final a is not inflected if in a state of constru etion (agreeab ly to th e ru les of Persian grammar) w ith anotherw ord, as w e d i da e h osh men, in th e eye of pru
General R u lesfor Declension .
(n
dence 33K.) U
ln)
’
z abani rehh ta men,
‘
in th e R ekhtadialect. ’
26 . General ru les for th e D eclension qf Nouns.
1 . In c lasses I . and I I . the nom inative singu lar remains
u naltered throu ghou t , th e plu ral term inations b eingsu peradded . 2 . In c lass I I I . th e nom inative singu lar
is changed or inflec ted into h“5 e , for th e ob liqu e sin
gu lar and nom inative plu ral, and th e term inations of
th e ob liqu e cases plu ral are su bstitu ted for, not added
to, th e term ination of th e singu lar. 3 . All plu ralsend in U, on in th e ob liqu e cases, that is, w henever a
post-position is added or u nderstood . 4 . Th e voc ativeplu ral alw ays ends in 0 , hav ing dropped th e final U n
of th e ob liqu efi 5. W ords of th e first and second
c lasses, c onsisting of tw o Short syllab les, th e last ofw hich be ingfatha ,
drop th efatha on rec e iving a plu ralterm ination ; thu s a n}: taraf, aside , nom . plu r.
tarferi , gen . lS Up}: tarfon ha, &C . , not tarafeh , SEC .
a . A few w ords are su bj ect to slight deviations from th e strict 'ru le, am ong w hich w e may m ention th e follow ing . 1. Wordsending ,3 nw ,
preceded by a long vow el, as ,3l.'
1 nah w , a name ,
pauw ,th e foot, and pigganw , a village , rej ect th e J.» riw ,
and sub stitu te th e mark hamz a on receiv ing a plural termination
,thu s lSUflnpa,on ha, Stc .
,of th e feet . 2 . Th e w ord “f l
?
ga'
,e,a co w ,
makes in th e nominative plu ralall? ga,en, and in
th e ob liqu e plu ral Ujlf
ga,on, thus resemb ling th e ob liqu e plu ralofpb
/ganw ,
a village . 3 . A few fem inine dim inu tives in biya, like randiya, ch ipiya, SLc .
, form th e nom inative plural bym ere ly adding a nasal n, as U
h) ? ch iriyiiri, w hich is evidently
a contraction for ch iriya,en, th e regu lar form . 4 . Mascu linesof th e third class ending in Anya , m ay follow th e general ru le, orchange th e y in to a h amz a b efore th e inflection ; thu s Q lu
saya , a shade (of a tree), gen . lg saye 1522, or lSq’
ln It
32 P ost position—Adjectiv es.
P
5 . Th e w ord M U rup iya , a r0 0pee , h as generally rup ae,
for th e nom inative plu ral .2 7 P ost-position .
—In th is w ork, to avo id confu sion ,
w e apply th e term post-position only to those inseparab le partic les or term inations w hic h invariab ly fo llowth e n ou ns to w hich they b elong . They may be u nitedw ith the ir su b stan tiv es so as to appear like th e c ase:term inations in Latin , Greek, and Sanskrit , or theym ay b e w ritten separately , as w e have given them inth e examples for dec lension . Th e m ost u sefu l and
importan t of them are th e fo llow ing, v iz . : lS ha, L; he,
6 5 1 ,h i‘
of,’
th e sign of th e genitive case ; ho ,‘
to ,’
th e Sign of th e dative , and som etim es of th e ac c u sativeor obj ec tive case se, from ,
’
or‘
w ith ’
(also w e!
son , u ?“ sen ,
Lr‘f“ siti , are o ccasionally m et w ith), th e
sign of th e ab lative and instru mental ; 1 3 par (sometim es in poe try i
npa),‘
u p ,
’
onum men,
‘
in ,
’ ‘
into ,
’
LQ‘
tah , talah , a i l lag ,
‘
u p to ,
’ ‘
as
far as,’ till , ’
th e Sign of th e locativ e c ase ; and, lastly ,
'
d ne, by,
’
th e sign of th e agent .a . Th e post- positions requ ire th e w ords t o w hich they are
affixed to b e in th e inflected form ,if they b elong to class I I I
and they are generally u n ited w ith th e ob liqu e form m U, on of
all plurals. On th e other hand , an inflected form in th e singu larcan only occu r in comb ination w ith a post-position
,expressed or
u nderstood,and th e sam e ru le applies to all bondfide ob liqu e
forms in U, on of th e plural . There are a few expressions inwhich th e ob liqu e form in U on 1s u sed for th e nom inativeplu ral ; and w hen a num eral precedes, th e nom inative form m ay
be u sed for th e ob liqu e,as w ill be noticed more fu lly in th e
Syntax .
Of Adjectiv es.
28 . Adjec tiv es in H indu stan i generally precedethe ir su bstantives, and w ith th e exception of those
34 D egrees of Comparison .
borrow ed from th e Persian, are, for th e most part, indeclinab le .
There are some,how ever, w hich are inflected into i; e for th e
m ascu line, and rest
-
i for th e feminine, like those ending ini ii ; among these may b e reckoned mi l) rci nda, rej ected
, Xd lu(a P
Sada, plain, as»
’umda, exalted, ma: ganda, fetid, soi l» mai n
0 9
da, tired, tnn
js. kh urinda , glu ttonou s, sharminda
,
ashamed, M hamzna, mean , g lgp bochara , helpless,naha
'
ra, u seless, sw ab nadida, u nseen,3dbdclj> haramz ada
,
base, yah-siilah , annu al, alla y ) do salah , b iennial ,
and perhaps a few m ore .
d . Th e maj ority of adj ectives pu rely Indian , together w ith all
present and past participles of verbs, end in l a (su bj ect toinflection) for th e mascu line , and gs“
, i for th e feminine . All
adj ectives in l ii,pu rely Persian orArab ic, are indeclinab le, w ith
perhaps th e sole exception of 14>juda, separate,’ distinct, ’ anda fe w that may have b ecome natural iz ed in Hindu stani bychanging th e final s of th e Persian into l a, like fu liinci ,‘
su ch a one,’
o r so and so .
’
29 . D egrees of Comparison . Th e adj ec tives in
H indu stan i have no regu lar degrees of com parison ,
and th e manner in w hich this defec t is su pplied w ill
b e fu lly explained in th e Syntax . Suffice it here tosay that w hen tw o obj ec ts are compared , that w ithw hich th e c omparison is made is pu t in th e ab lativecase , like th e Latin . Thu s, for exam ple , ‘ this hou seis high ,
’
Us Aalnx?p yih ghar bu land hai ,
‘ this hou seis h igher than th e tree ,
’
Us a U
» c—Agy d 15 -6. 59212
ghar darakh t se bu land h ai, literally , this hou se (compared) w ith th e tree is high . Th e su perlativ e degreeis merely an extreme comparison formed by referenceto th e w ord w sab, as
Us tu b
L5.» w flf ‘
E’ y ih
ghar sab se bu land hai , this hou se (compared) w ith allis high ,
’
or‘ this i s th e h ighest ho u se of al l .
’
P ronouns.
1 '
Of P ronouns.
P ersonal P ronouns.
30 . Th e pronou ns differm ore or less from th e su b
stantiv es in the irmode of inflec tion . Those ofth e firstand sec ond persons form th e gen itive in l) ra , 4, re, and
ri , instead of 15 ha,Ste . They have a distinc t dative
and accu sative form in e (singu lar), and v i en (plu ral),b esides that made by th e sign ho . They also formth e ob liqu e in a m anner pecu liar to themselves, andadm it generally of th e elision of th e term ination U, on,in th e ob liqu e plural . They have th e dative and ac
c u sativ e cases in b oth numb ers th e sam e ; and lastly,th e cases of th e Agent are never inflec ted in th e sin
gu lar, these b eing alw ays main no and tu na or w in ne,
nevermnjh ne and tujh no .
Th e first personal pronou n is thus declined
Ufa main, I .
Plu ral .
4. 9i meri ,
D .
Uni “
:mujh e, me, or
mujh ho to me
A.
U.» 45
° mnjh se, from me from u s
9
W W mujh men, m me
Ag. J, W main na, by me
11am,W e
kamdrd llama-
n o,
flame-
WE,f.
flamen,‘
kam ko, ,
h umor? 100 ,
ham se,
fiamon se,
fiam men,
Ilamanmen,
fiam no,
ka'
monno,
36 D emonstrativ e P ronouns.
I n th is example w e have three forms essen tiallyd istinc t from each o ther, v iz . , th e nom inative , genitive ,and ob liqu e modification in th e singu lar, as
W main,
mera , as: majh and in th e plu ral
(a h am , blab
kamara,and
rmh am or
w a s h uman. From th e ob liqu em odifications, "6-5
4 majh , and(s h am or h amon,
th e o ther ob liqu e cases are form ed by add ing th e re
qu isite post- positions, except that th e case deno tingth e agent is in th e singu lar k
“; W mainne .
Th e second personal pronoun tu or US"tain is declined in
a similar manner.
Singu lar. Plural .
N . w or J)‘
at or ta in, Tho u (3 tum,
You
tera, &c .,thy
tajko, to thee,tujlz ko, or thee
.9
tujb se, from thee
tujh -men, in thee
til - ne, by thee
a i-tu, O.
thou
D emonstrativ e P ronou ns.
3 1 . In H indu stani th e dem onstrative pronou ns,th is, ’ that, ’ these , ’
and those , ’
at th e same timesu pply th e place of ou r third person h e ,
’
she ,’
i t,
Ptumfien
, to youtum tumia or
tumh on-ko, you
tum tumb or
tumh on- se, fromyou
tum tumlz or
tumbou-men,in
you
tum or tumfion
ne,by you
a i tum,O ye .
D emonstrativ e P ronouns. 37
and‘ they .
’
Th ey are th e sam e for b oth genders,and th e c ontext
'
alone determ ines h ow they are to b e
rendered into English . Th e w ord «ayih ,‘ this, ’ ‘
h e ,’
sh e ,’
or it,’
is u sed w hen reference ismade to a personorobj ec t th at is near ; and s
,w u h ,
‘ that , ’ ‘
h e ,’ ‘sh e ,
’
or
‘
it,’
w hen w e referto that w h ich is m ore remote . Th e
proximate dem onstrative fl yih ,‘
h e ,’ ‘
sh e ,’ ‘
it, this, ’
is dec lined as follow s
Singu lar. Plural .‘
t‘i yih , This, h e , &c .
6 1 ye,These, they
G .
65ui al is-ka,
- Ice, Jri , of j 65 ls
L”l in-kt
’
i,
- ke, Jei , ofI this, h im , &c .
" I these, of themD '
Lf’fa d is—Ico or ise
,to
w e” 35u’ in-ko or inben,
I I
to this, to h im , to these, to&c . them
Ac . jSL/“l w i yih , is
—ko, ise, -this, ye, in ko
,inh en,
I Ih im
, &c . these, them
is-se, from this,h im
, &c .
i s-men , 111 this,I
h im,&c .
is-ne, by this, h im g q i l d vi
&c .
l
In this example w e see that th e nom inative yih ischanged into is for th e ob liqu e cases singu lar, and th e
nom inative plural ye b ecom es in for th e ob liqu e plu ral ,j u st as in English h e b ec omes h im ,
’
and they, ’
them .
’
In th e ob liqu e cases plu ral , it may b e m en i
tioned that b esides th e form J in , w e sometimes mee tw ith 43\ ink and
w yejl inkon, though not so common .
Th e dative singu lar h as tw o forms, one by adding ko,
ia-se, from these,from themI
in men,in these,
in themI
in-no,inbonne, by
these,by them .
38 I nterrogativ e, R elativ e, &c .
like th e su bstantives, and an o ther b y adding “0 05 e, as
is-ko or is- e ; in th e plu ral w e have in - lfo and in- lzen.
Th e ac cu sative is generally like th e dative , b u t o ftenth e same as th e nom inative , as in th e dec lension of
su b stan tives.
32 . Th e dem onstrative 82, ‘ that,h e , sh e ,
’ ‘it ;
’
th e
in terrogative u ); kaun ,
‘
w h o ?’ ‘
w hat ? ’
th e relative Pjo, h e Wh o ,
’
sh e w h o ,
’
&c .,and th e correlative J“ so ,
that same , ’
are prec isely sim ilar in term ination toin th e foregoing example ; h ence it w ill su ffice to giveth e nom inatives, and one or tw o ob liqu e cases of each ,thu s
R emote D emonstrativ e.
Singu lar. Plural .
a,w u lz, He, sh e
,it, h?) w e, They, those
orthatG . “SOw l us lea, &c . ul ail u ‘ u n
,u nfi
,u nfionka,
K &c .
DG“w l asko
,u se
u se-ll 95 u i u nko or unken.
I nterrogativ e (applied to persons or individu als).
w ; Iraan, Who ? “3 5 kau n, Who ?w hich ? w hich
G . KUs kis, ka, &c . w as4—5as kin, kin/z, kinkonlg kt
'
i , &c .
I nterrogativ e (applied to matter or qu antity).
LS kya, What ? Same as th e singu lar.G . [f u
nk Iaabe, Ica, &c .
Some tim es KU“) w is [ct-
l,&c . and in th e plu r. w i} w )
w in,w in/z , o r w inkon, ka, &c .
P ossessive P ronouns.
R elativ e .
Singu lar.
f .
» jo or U) ? jau n, He
w h o, sh e w h o,
that w hichG . K
w ? J ZS kC-
l,&c .
Correlativ e .
ya so or same y
a so or U): tau n
,These sam e
G . lgU “; tis lea, &c . ux
fi
fifl
c)” tin
, tin/z,tinlzon
(g as, &c .
D ‘
as“
: 15v i"
P ossessiv e P ronou ns.
33 . Th e genitives singu lar and plu ral of th e personal and dem onstrative pronou ns are u sed adj ec tivelyas possessives, like th e meu s, tu u s, noster, v ester, &c . ,
of th e Latin , and in c onstru ction they fo llo w th e ru le
given respec ting adjec tives in i 5 . There is, how ever,i n addition to these , another possessive of frequ entoc cu rrence , v iz . lu l apna, u g’ apne, and
c si‘i‘ apni ,
"o w n , or
‘be longing to self, ’
w hich u nder certain c ir
c umstances su pplies th e place of any of th e rest , as w illb e fu lly explained in th e Syn tax . Th e w ord cHTZip ,
self, ’
is u sed w ith or w ithou t th e personal pronou ns ;thu s, (c a l
u“ main ap , I myself,
’
w hich m ean ing m ayb e conveyed by employing c a l ap alone . B u t th e m ostfrequ en t u se of cpl ap is to b e m et w ith as a su b sti
tu te for th e sec ond person , to express respec t , w hen itm ay b e translated , you , sir,
’ you r honou r, ’ ‘ yo u rw orship
,
’
&c . W hen u sed in this sense , cg ! ap 1s
Plu ral .
j? jo or jann, Theyw h o
,those w h o
or w hichw j z n, jin lz , J tnlzon
kZi, &c .
40 I ndefinite P ronouns.
dec lined like a w ord of th e second c lass of su bstan
tiv es u nder th e singu lar form ,thu s
u l up ; you r honou rG .
Ufa5K” ap
-ka,
-ke,-ki
,of you r honou r
D . 8LAc .
ji gl ap
-ko,to you r honou r
,you r honou r
A.
L5.» c
g) ! &p
- se, from you r honou r
L . cza l tip
-men,in you r honou r
Agt. d cal tip- ne
,by you r honou r.
W hen th e w ord cpl"
Zip denotes se lf, it is dec lined as
fo llo w sc a l 6p , self
,myself
, &c .
"Jl Lil ap nc
’
i,ap ne, ap u
‘
t‘
, o w n, ofself, &c .
D &Ac f w lf ca l c
'
zp ko or ap ne ko, to self, self.el f-
“j" ap no ta , zn,
0
Th e phrase W opus-men deno tes among ou r
selves, you rse lv es,’
or them selves,’
ac c ord lng to th e
nom inative of th e sentence .
I ndefinite P ronou ns.
34 . Under th is head w e c lassall those w ords w h ichhave m ore or less of a pronom inal signification . Th e
fo llo w ing are of frequ ent occ u rrence ek, one ;
be}: du sra , ano ther ” a dono oruflfi donon, b o th ” l
o ur, other (m ore) ; g izo ir, oth er (differen t) ; d a m
ou’
xc, certain ; up: baku t, m any , m u ch w sob, all,
everyJb liar, each ; w u lana or Ulla fu lanc
’
i , a certain
ko , i , any one , some one ; ku ch h , any thing,som e thing 6
5 ka , z and 34> chand,some , several ,
many LzS kitna or l kittZZ, h ow m any ? J ztna or
LTjittZi , as many Ul itna , or U) ittZi , so many . They
are all regu lar in the ir inflec tions, w ith th e exception
42 I ndefi nite P ronouns.
Th e compou nd adj ective pronouns of th e indefinite kind are
” l c’
fiil,
[
& lv j l or d d if ?
" another, 937g d d som e one ,
l or +15 some other, c fi tl a} c f -ti one or other,
dag) , l som e one else , som ething else , w fl l th e
rest, L5
»;yua n
;
or ) ) l c f“ som e others, & l uu p m any
a one , A w a s; m u ch , ”l w m any m ore , L5
.» w or
1; 1 ° every one , 4 55;
w or +5;In every thing, c fi tl c m “
,
& l} or every one, a
); w hichever, J) l u gs
some other, at}? w hoever, as
sP
" w hatever,cg; &3
c f";
00 ]
som e one or other, c figl assor Q 45
5somew hat, ) ,l 4 5 5
some m ore , +5; &3 fig something or other. Th e u se and ap
plication of al l th e pronou ns w ill b e fu lly explained u nder thathead in th e Syn tax .
c . Under this section w e ou ght in strictness to inclu de th enumerals, of w hich w e here subj oin th e first decade, togetherw ith th e corresponding figu res, Arabian and Indian
,b oth of w hich
are employed exactly like o u r ow n .
Names.F igu res. Names.
1 9. a s ek 6 1 i
2 R ya do 7 V ‘9
3 tin 8 A t
4 8 A”
; cfidr 9 l L
5 it {itp dnch 10 l . 1°
I n Hindustani, th e numerals from ten to a hu ndred are not
simple and regu lar as ou rs these w e shall treat of hereafter.
SECTION I II .
Of th e Verb disfi’
z.
35 . ALL ve rb s in H indu stan i are conj ugated in
exac tly th e same m anner. So far as term inationsare c oncerned ,
there is not a single irregu lar verb inth e langu age . There is, stric tly speaking , b u t one
sim ple tense (th e aorist), w hic h is c harac teriz ed byd istinc t personal end ings ; th e o ther tenses b e ingformed by m eans of th e presen t and past partic iples,toge ther w ith th e au xiliary to b e .
’
Th e infinitiv e or
verbal nou n , w hic h alw ays ends in U nu (su bj ec t toinflec tion), is th e form in w hic h verb s are given in
Dic tionaries ; hence it w ill b e of m ore prac tical u tilityto consider this as th e sou rce from w h ic h all th e o therparts spring .
36 . From th e infin itive are form ed , by very sim pleand invariab le ru les, th e three princ ipal parts of th everb , w hich are th e fo llo w ing — 1 . Th e second personsingu lar of th e imperative or roo t , by rej ec ting th e
final Uno as from Lil}; bolnd , to speak, com es J) ;
speak thou . 2 . Th e presen t partic iple , w hic h isalw ays form ed by c hanging th e final U 7222 of th e
infinitive into UtZi , as U): bolna , to Speak, bl}: baltii ,
speaking . 3 . Th e past partic iple 1s form ed b y leav ingou t th e
un of th e infin itive , as Up
’
bolnc'
z , to Speak,ll}; bolt
—i , spoken . If, ho w ever, th e UnZi of th e infin itive
b e preceded b y th e long vo w e ls l Zi or J o, th e pastpartic iple is formed by changing th e u
n in to y , in
order to avo id a d isagreeab le hiatu s ; thu s from U)!ki nd ,to b ring , c om es U}! liiyZi (not l
i
t lZi b rou ght ; so U”ronc
'
z'
, to w eep , makes by royu l n th e past partic iple .
These three parts b eing thu s ascertained , it w ill be
44 Auxiliary Verb .
very easy to form all th e variou s tenses, &c . , as in
th e examples w hic h w e are ab o u t to su bj o in .
3 7 . As a pre lim inary step to th e c onj u gation of
all verb s, it w ill b e ne cessary to learn carefu lly th e
fo llo w ing fragmen ts of th e au xiliary v erb‘to b e ,
’
w hic h frequ en tly o c c u r in th e langu age , not on ly inth e formation of tenses, b u t in th e mere assertion of
sim ple existence .
P resent Tense.
Singu lar. Plural .
w );u“ main nu n, I am u g
h
ra
jlzam fia in
,w e are
c s!”y til Iza i , thou art
yrs(I? tum 710 , you are
Us»a; w u/i lia i, h e, sh e , it is u ?
“ w e Izain, they are .
P ast Tense .
lé' w : ma in“725i
,I w as
£555"
(c a 12am til e, w e w ere
lg)étit tba,thou w ast
L563f;tum th e, you w ere
lei?r) w u fi t/za'
,h e or it w as
L5 43 cf) w e til e, they w ere .
a . Th e first of these tenses is a cu riosity in its w ay, as
it is th e on ly present tense in th e langu age characteriz ed byd ifferent terminations, and independent of gender. Instead ofth e form
6° h a i
,in th e second and third persons singu lar,
Kn lia iga is frequ ently m et w ith in verse ; and in th e plu ral,
w’é‘ z’ bainge for w
e h am in th e first and third persons. In
th e past tense , la? t/i of th e singu lar b ecom es v.13 th
'
i w henth e nom inative is fem in ine , and in th e plu ral am. W e may
here remark that throu ghou t th e conj u gation of all verbs, w henth e singu lar term inates in a(mascu line), th e plu ral becomes e
and if th e nom inatives b e fem inine, th e 21 becom es 2 for th e sin
gu lar and in (contracted for iyan) for th e plural . If severalfem inine term inations in th e plu ral follow in su ccession, th e inis added only to th e last, bu t even here there are exceptions.
Conjugation . 45
38 . W e shall no w proc eed to th e conj u gation of an
intransitive or ne u ter verb , and w ith a vie w to assistth e m emory , w e shall arrange th e tenses in th e order
of the ir formation from th e three princ ipal parts alreadyexplained . Th e tenses, as w ill be seen , are n ine in
nu m ber— three tenses b e ing form ed from eac h of th e
three princ ipal parts. A fe w additional tenses of c omparativ ely rare occ u rrenc e w ill b e detailed hereafter.
Infin itive , u , bolnii , To Speak .
”
é:a, IImperative and root J) ; 60 1, Speak (thou )
g glPresent participle lab.) bo lta, speaking
a:Q‘
Past participle ll) ; bo la, spoke or spoken .
1 . Tenses formed from th e root .Aorist.
English I m ay speak, ’ &c .
Ima in boliln
U‘J)’
(is [tam bo len
'
.
US}?{
7 tit bole d}; r? tumbolo
w u lz bo leUJ):gs)
w e bo leri .
F u ture .
English I shall or w ill speak, ’ &c .
ma in bo lunga c ‘ ii’
t’b h am boleiige
tit bo lega agiyrb
f;tum bo loge
w u/z bo legii 5 “us;
w e bolenge
bolungi , &c .fem . bo lengin, &c .
I mp erativ e.
g pglish Let m e speak, Speak thou , ’ &c .
U5) ! u “ ma in bo lu n Uri) ; (
1b liam bolen
J) ; 33 tu bo l j) : (a tum 60 10
vo l)? 4} w e 60 1872 .
46 Conjugation .
2 . Tenses form ed from th e presen t partic ipleI ndefin ite .
English (as a present tense), I speak, thou speakest , ’ &c .
,
(conditional) If I spoke, h ad I spoken , ’ &c ., I
u sed to speak .
’
U) ? u
m ma inboltc‘
zL523) ; V
b 11am bo lte
U) ; 7
7 tit bo ltc'
zr
.» tum bo lte
u); 8)w u li bo ltc
'
zgal}; w e bo lte .
P resent.
English I speak or am speaking, ’ &c .
L9)” bl) : Uta ma in bo ltci Mm
u ntoGal) ; (
” b h am bo lte iza in
L511: U
): tu bo lta fiai
jbL523) ; (3 tum bo lte 110
L? U) ; a; w u k bolta hai u s“Lg) ; hf) w e bolte ba in.
English -‘
I w as speaking, thou w ast, ’ &c .
lei“
bl) ; U
“
:ma inboltfi th e
-
tL556;
rt
:11am bo lte tke
lg? U) ; jgtit bo ltii t/zii
L74 3 f
": tum bo lte t/ze
lei?U); a} w u fi boltii tfic'
zESQ)
.
4 , w e bo lte fire .
3 . Tenses from th e past partic ipleP ast.
English- J I spoke , thou spokest,’
&c .
I) ? U
“
:ma in [70 122
f”
?12am bo le
tit bo ldL3) ; VJ tum bole
Y) ;
a, w u lz bo le
-
t J) ; w e bole
P erfect.
Eh glish I have spoken, thou hast, ’ &c .
551 c!“ main bo lt-
z kilnu
.»(In bam bo le [la in
$551” 9 tu bo lii [ mi y L9) ; V3 tum bo le 110
umll) : 8; w uh bo lii li ai
u.»
L{J “
5
5, w e bole lia iri .
Conjugation .
P lup erfect.
English I h ad spoken, thou hadst spoken , ’ &c .
lei? we ma in bo la th ci
6 9: J) ; (as h am hole th e
if; j tii bola th iiL563
(3 tum bo le th e
lei i) ; 8) w u h bola th iiL543vi) ? 4} w e bo le th e.
4 . Misc ellaneou s verb al expressions
R esp ectfu l I mp era tiv e or P recati v e .
L537 ; bo liye or
bo liyo, You , h e, &c .,be pleased to speak .
’
my bo l iyegc'
z , Yo u , h e , &c ., w ill have th e goodness to speak.
’
I nfinitiv e (u sed as a geru nd or verbal nou n).
Nom . Uji bo ln ii ,‘
Speaking z’
gen . lSL533) ; bo lne ha, &c .
,O f
Speaking, ’ &c .
, like su bstantives of thethird class.
Nou n of Agency.
ill) bolne w a la, and sometim es Hmk“5
.5.1 bo lne-hara, A
speaker, ’ one w h o 1s capab le of speaking.
’
P articip les, u sed adjectiv ely.
Pres. b l}; bo ltii or ljmbi) ; ho ltii bo lte or 4 31»U z i) ; bo lte
h i nd, fem . bolti or h ii,e,fem . boltiri or bo lt
'
i
bo lti hu,
'
i . h ii,i 7i
Past . 60 16 or ism ll) ; bo lii L2) ; bo le or bo le h u 6
h ig h , fem . bo li or bo li fem . boli ri or 6 ii hu,iri .
h it,3
M tiv e (indeclinable). u )’ bo l, J) : bo le,
bolkar, 65}J) : bo l kar-ke, or
1515J) :
having spoken .
Adv erbia l p articip le (indeclinab le). 6°a) ;
bo lte-h i , On
speaking, or on (th e instant of) speaking.
48 Formation of Tenses.
a . W e may here briefly notice h o w th e variou s portions of th e
verb are form ed . Th e aorist,it w ill be seen
,is th e on ly part
w orthy of th e name sf tense , and it proceeds directly from th e
root by adding th e term inations ini , e, e , for th e singu lar, and e n
0, en
,for th e plu ral . Th e fu tu re is form ed directly from th e
aorist by adding gii to th e singu lar and go to th e plural form ascu lines, or by adding gi and g iydn (generally contractedinto gin) w hen th e nom inative to th e verb is fem inine . Th e
imperative differs from th e aorist m erely in th e second personsingu lar, by u sing th e bare root w ithou t th e addition of th e term ination e . Hence , th e fu tu re and imperative are m ere m odifications of th e aorist, w hich w e have placed first
,as th e tense
p ar excellence . I t is needless to offer any rem ark on th e
tenses form ed from th e present participle, as th e reader w illeasily learn them by inspection . Th e three tenses from th e pastparticiple are equ ally simple in all neu ter or intransitive verbs ;bu t in transitive verbs they are su bj ect to a pecu liarity of con
stru ction, w hich w ill b e noticed further on . Th e proper u se
and application of th e van ou s tenses and other parts of th e verbw ill b e fu lly treated of in th e Syntax .
b . As th e aorist holds th e m ost prom inen t rank in th e Hin
du stani v erb , it w ill b e proper to notice in this place a few
eu phonic pecu liarities to w hich it is subj ect . 1 . When th e
root ends in ii,th e letter w is optionally inserted in th e aorist
betw een th e root and those term inations that b egin w ith e thu sUll ldn ii, to bring, root 3 Id aorist “a l
l liiw e org
i
ll li ne . 2 . Whenth e aorist ends in o , th e letter w is Optionally inserted, or th egeneral ru le m ay be observed , or th e initial vow els of th e term ination m ay all vanish , as w ill be seen in th e verb h and, w hichw e are ab ou t to su bj oin . Lastly, w hen th e root ends in e, th e
letter w m ay be inserted betw een th e root and those term inations w hich b egin w ith e
, or th e w being om itted, th e final e of
th e root is absorbed in th e term inations throu ghou t . Thu s lawden t
'
i, to give , root do,aorist d eiu i, dew e, dew e ; dew en de,o ,
dew eri ; or, contracted , dun, de, de ; de n, do , deli . It is needlessto add that th e fu tu re and imperative of. all su ch verbs are su b
ject to th e sam e m od ification .
50 Th e Verb To B e .
’
I mpera tiv e .
Let m e be , be thou , &c .
I z
w )» u~ e ma in h o
,in i or h on
9
3b
,3'
tit h oI
5 9 i at}
w ah h ow e,h o,e, or h o .
u i jb ‘
w in k rm ham how en h o,eri , or h ori
310 "
J )»i“ tum h o
,o or h o
u gdf b 55) w e h ow en, ho ,en, or h on .
I ndefinite.
I am , I m ight b e , I u sed to be, or become .
rib h am
tum
9 ) w e
P resent.
I am ,or I become, &c .
I
main hoti'
t hun U3;gs”? ff
tit h otii hai p,E53,»(3
w u h hatli haiwasg
’Jh 4 )
I mp erfect.
I w as becom ing, &c .
mainffham
j tit h otii th ii tum hate the .
8; w ithi
4 ) w e
r?ham
bf)“ (J tum
The Verb To‘
B e .
’
I have become, &c .
Singu lar. Plural .ma in h ii , ii h itri 43; (b h am h ii ,e hain
if}étit h it,ii hai ,p43; f;tum h ii
,e h o
a} w u h h ind h ai w e h ii ,e ha in.
P lup erfect.
I h ad become, &c .
r?“
(Jh ii
,d thd d eli “an: tum h ii ,e th e .
R espectfu l I mp era tiv e, &c .
W fiZ-
‘jiZ/eyfl jb h ujiyo , orQ )
; h ujiegiz , be pleased toor to b ecom e .
I nfinitiv e, or Verbal Nou n .
U)» honiz , b eing, h one kit, &c . ,
of being.
Noun of Agency or Condition .
h onew iz ld, that w hich is, or becomes.
Pres. U)» h otii, or if»U,» h otiz h ii ,iz , be ing, becom ing .
Past . Sb h i nd, been, or become .
Conjunctiv e P articip le .
&c . é,»j ,»,b h o, h ohar, h oke, &c . , having b een, or become .
Adv erbia l P articip le.
u“ h ote h i , on b eing, or becom ing .
a . W e may here observe that th e aor1st,fu tu re, and indefinite
ofU,» h ona, to be, ’ are som etimes u sed as au xiliaries w ith th e
present ”
and past participles of other verbs, so as to give u s threeadditional tenses. These from their nature are not of very frequent occu rrence , and some forms of them w e confess w e have
52 Additional Tenses.
never met w ith in any w ork, printed or m anu script, except in
gramm ars. They are how ever considered as distinct parts of
th e verb by native gramm arians, therefore it is b u t right thatthey shou ld find a place here .
‘W e therefore su bj oin them ,
together w ith their native appellations, reserving th e account oftheiru se and application till w e come to th e Syntax .
1 . H al i mu tashakk'
i, literally, presen t dub iou s.
’
English I may or shall be speaking.
’
(a ?
K», 9 U) y
o U) : w e ma in bolta h o,un or h ou nga
U}; tu bo ltiz h ow e or h ow ega
Kgp U) ; a; w u h bo ltii h o w e or h ow egii
vi a) ? d o}? i
n h am bo lte h ow enor h ow enge
J
’
f ’gal) ; f
: tum bolte h o,o or h o,oge
up) ? cal) ; “é“
w e bolte - h ow eri or h o w enge .
2 . M itz i mu tashaklci orM ashkii lc, past dub iou s.
’
English I m ay or shall have spoken .
“
uffa ll) : u ~ o ma in bo la h o ,u h or h annga
00
liflm i
f} j.» tu bo la h ow e or h ow ega
K’flb g
ag) » ll) ; 3
1. w ah bo liz h ow e or h ow ega
w i t)”
(to h am bo le h ow eri or h ow enge
£5?) i j) » u
’fi r? tum bo le h o
,o or h o,oge
L=si
hf) w e bo le h ow eri or h ow enge.
3 . M iiz i shartiya or miiz i mu tamanni .
P ast Conditiona l.
English Had I been speaking, ’ or h ad I Spoken .
’
ve e main9
baltit h otiz, or hold h otii .
Transitiv e Verbs.
L3) ? g igs:gfi (3 tum bo lte hote, or bo le h ote.
b . Of these three tenses, th e first is of rare occu rrence ; th esecond is m ore common, and th e fu tu re form of th e au xiliary ism ore u su al than th e aorist in both tenses. Th e third tense , or
past conditional , is of very rare occurrence u nder th e ab ove form ,
its place being generally su pplied by th e simpler form bl) ;ma in bo ltci , th e first of th e tenses from th e present participle,w hich on accou nt of its variou s significations w e have given u nderth e appellation of th e I ndefinite Tense . In th e Father of
Gramm ars,
” that of Dr. Gl lch rist,4to . Calcu tta, 17 96, and also
in tw o native treatises in ou r possession,th e variou s form s ma in
main bo ltii h otii,
’
main bo ltii h ii ,ii h otiz ,’
and‘
ma in
bo liz h otiz ,’
are all included u nder th e appe llation of mils? sharti ,
ormiigi mu tamanni , that is, Past Conditional . I t is tru e, th e form‘
ma in boltiz h as occasionally a present signification , b ut to callit a present tense
,as is done in some of ou r grammars, is leading
th e student into a gross error, as w e shal l she w hereafter.
40 . W e Shall now give an exam ple of a transitiveverb , w hich as w e hav e already hin ted is liab le to a
pecu liarity in those tenses w hic h are form ed from th e
past partic iple . Th e fu ll explanation of this anomalyb e longs to th e Syntax . Su ffice it here to say thatth e c onstru c tion resemb les to a certain exten t th epassive vo ice of th e c orresponding tenses in Latin .
Thu s for example , th e sentenc e He h as w ritten one
le tter, ”
may in Latin , and in m ost Eu ropean tongu es, b eexpressed in tw o differen t w ays, b y w hich th e assertionam ou nts to exac tly th e sam e thing , v iz . , I lle u nanz
ep istolam scripsit, or f‘
Ab illo una ep istola scripta est.”
No w these tw o m odes of expression c onv ey th e sam e
idea to th e m ind , b u t in H indu stan i th e latter formonly is allow ed ; thu s “
u s ne eh eb igh i likh i hai,”
or
“b y h im one letter h as b een w ritten . Hence , in
54 Conjugation of a Transitiv e Verb .
Hindu stan i those tenses of a transitiv e verb w h ich are
form ed from th e past partic iple , w ill have their nom inative cases changed into that form of th e ab lativeexpressive of th e agen t . W hat ou ght to b e th e ac cusative of th e sentenc e w ill b ecom e th e real nom inative ,w ith w hich th e verb agrees acc ordingly, except insom e instances w hen it is requ isite that th e ac c u sativ eShou ld have th e partic le ko affi xed , in w hich c ase th e
verb is u sed in its sim plest form of th e m asc u line Sin
gu lar, as w e have given it b e lo w .
a . It is needless to say that in all verbs th e tenses from th e
root and presen t participle are formed after th e sam e m anner,
and th e pecu liarity ab ove allu ded to is lim ited to transitive verbsonly, -
and to onlyfou r tenses of these,—w hich it is particu larly tohe w ished that th e stu dent shou ld w ell rem ember. In th e following verb , Ujle mitrnci , to beat or strike, ’ w e have given all th e
tenses in ordinary u se, together w ith their variou s oriental appe llations, as given in a Treatise on Hindu stani Grammar
, compiledby a m u nshi in th e service of Mr. Chicheley Plow den . I t is afolio volum e
, w ritten in Hindu stani, b u t w ithou t au thor’
s name,
date , or title .
Infin itive (masdar), lsjt. marna , To b eat .
)le mar
,beat thou ; Ujle mirrtci , beating ; ble mizrii, beaten .
1 . Tenses of th e roo tAorist (mu gari
Singu lar. Plu ral .
um I may b eat if
w e m ay beat
,i’ thou m ayst beat
Julef” you m ay beat
a}h e may beat they may beat.
F u ture (mustalcbi l).
cfie I sh all orw ill beat
gy
/
Cejlef'b w e shal l or w ill
beat5 thou shalt or w ilt é)
l’ c(3 you shall or w ill
beat beata, h e shall or w il l
oi l) . 4 , they shall or w ill
beat boat .
Conjugation , &c .
I mp era tiv e (amr).
Singu lar. Plural .f
u vlreum
;let m e beat
a ul»(Jb let u s b eat
Jim
,3 beat thou ”Le(3°
beat ye or you
ga le 8)let h im beat
J ule5 5}
let them beat .
2 . Tenses of th e present partic ipleI ndefinite, or P ast Conditional (maxi shart
'
i or maxi
mu tamanni).
g}; f?w e beat
ugh r? ye beatthey b eat.
P resen t (fai l).
I am beating an; djle r
m w e are beatingthou art beating j
ib djlefit you are beating
gmUjLo a
) h e is b eating cf ?” sible 5-5)
they are beating.
I mp erfec t (istimrc’
iri
I w as beating L5 ?djimfb w e w ere beating
n'Ujiro thou w ast beu tin
u pdj le (
4 you w ere beatingP
WLJ" 0 3)h e w as beatmg 9 6
dj“; 4 ) they w ere b eating.
P resent D u bious (h e'
l l i
English I may,
shall, or w ill bebeating.
’
“Jud“
g ran
” L3)“r“
fi n d )“r’
f em”£35“a?)
3 . Tenses of th e past partic iple :P ecu liari ty .
-All th e nom inatives assume th e case of th e
agent, characteriz ed by th e post-position L3 no, th e verb agrees
56 P ecu liarities of a Transitiv e Verb .
w ith th e obj ect of th e sentence in gender and number, or 18 u sedimpersonally ‘
in th e mascu line singu lar form .
P ast Abso lu te (magi matla le).
English—‘I beat or did b eetz’ &c . Literally, It is or w as
b eaten by me, thee , h im ,u s
, you , or them .
’
Singu lar. Plu ral .d w
mainno 3 rm bam ne
lJLe g
r} {i
i -m ne d 6tum ne mara
'
.
d u n-l u s neul u n ne
P erfect, or P ast P roximate (magi kar’
i b).
English I have beaten .
’ Literally, It h as been (is) beatenby me, thee, h im ,
’&c .
g, ‘ ,M o main no bam ne
mart? ljle
Si r?
£3; J
.» tu nobai
ub j
l“:tum no
3 O J u s ne Ul nu ne
P lup erfect, or P ast R emote (magi ba’
id).
English—‘
I h ad"
b eaten .
" Literally, I t w as beatenthee,
Ima in ne
S3; rm h am no
49
a}V3 tum no
0
f
us'
ne (33 u l u n ne
P ast D u bious (magi masbku k).
English I shall have b eaten , ’ i. e . I t shall have been beatenby m e , thee, ’ 860 .
ma in no h am ne
I
g} fi tu ne gri tum ne
I
u s ne l nu ne
R esp ectfu l I mp erativ e (amri ta szmi).
L5 35)“mariye, &c . &c .
All th e other parts formed as in th e verb bolna.
58 P assiv e Voice.
th e m odern tongu es of Sanskrit origin ; Again , th e past participle gaya
'
,seem s to have ari sen from th e root 7 111, w hich also
2denotes to go . In th e caseof karna, to do, m ake,
’
it sprmgs
natu rally enough from th e modified form kar,of th e root kri ,
and at th e sam e time there w ou ld appear to have b een anotherinfinitive
, bind, directly from th e Sanskrit root, by changing th eri into i ; hence th e respectfu l im perative of this verb h as tw oform s
,kariye and Icijiye, w hile th e past participle Iciya com es
from ki nd, th e sam e as piyc’
i from p i n ii ,‘ to drink.
’ Lastly,
marnc'
i is from mar, th e m odified form ofamri at th e same
tim e th e form muna,w hence m it
,£i, m ay have been in u se ; for,
w e know that in th e Prakrit,w hich is a connecting link be tw een
th e Sanskrit and th e present Spoken tongu es of Northern India,th e -Sanskrit vow el ri began to b e generally discarded , and frequ ently changed into u , and th e Prakrit participle is mudo, forth e Sanskrit mrito ; ju st as from th e Sanskrit verbal nou n priclzbiana , w e have th e Hindu stani p iccli h nii, to ask
,
’ throu gh th ePrakri t p u cbbana .
42 . P assiv e Voice .
—In H indu stani th e u se of th e
passive vo ic e is not nearly so general as it is in Englishand o therEu ropean langu ages. I t is regu larly formedb y em ploying th e past (or passive) partic ip le of an
ac tive or transitive verb along w ith th e neu ter verbUls . Jana ,
‘
to go ,
’
or to b e .
’
Th e partic iple thu sem ployed is su bj ec t to th e same inflec tion or variations as an adje c tive pu re ly Indian (v . pageending in l 25. O f th e verb Jana itse lf, w e have j u stshew n that its past partic iple is gaya , w h ic h of cou rse
w ill ru n throu gh all th e tenses of th e past partic iple ,as w ill be seen in th e fo llo w ing paradigm .
Infinitive,Ui> blm mara j ana , To b e b eaten .
Imperative , l:> lJLe man; ja
'
, be thou beatenPresent Participle, Ulf U4 mara yata, beingbeatenPast Partic iple , marii gayii, beate
Passiv e
Tenses of th e roo t .Aorist.
Singular.
uil" Jieu“ I may be beaten
u gh» hal e r
m w e may be
3) thou mayst be ’
l>. “sale (3 you may be
beaten beatenm ay
' be midi? “fi le Lg, they may be
beaten beaten .
F u ture .
I shall or w illbe beaten
P
j? thou shalt or
w ilt'
be beatena}h e shall or w illbe beaten
I mp erativ e.
W let becf )" as) » F
» let u s be
beaten8
beatenl: bte y '
be thou beaten 3B ga le (J be ye beaten
8)let h im be
w ale 5:5l 4 ) let them be
beaten beaten.
Tenses of th e presen t partic iple .
Conditional.
Ula Li e Uri/{l 1f I be , or h ad J B ga l/o (b f/l if w e be , or
been, beaten h ad been , beaten
Ui> bl-c ,
jjfl if thou be
,or
u3l> “a le F
if i if you be , or
hadst b een, b eatenri
h ad b een , b eatenUh». lJ le éf l ifh e be, orh ad d
i la ga le g jf l ifth ey b e , orb eenfbeaten
gi t) ? héjlvio p
m w e shall or
w ill be b eaten
12533 (
I? you shall or
i
w ill be beaten
L564 )? gala hf) they shall or
w ill be beaten.
‘60 P assiv e Voice .
P resent.
Singu lar. Plu ral .
u p; t i>~ lJ lao u m I am b e1ng U‘J" d
bVb w e are b e.
b eaten ing beaten
9b Ui> blu e )
3 thou artbeing J»af t" r
; you are be
beaten ing b eaten613 Li l? l
Jl-vo 8
) h e is being uabUlib b
fl
qjlf o gas) they are be
beaten ing beaten .
I mp erfect.
I w as b eatenuse
" l v’
b b akeVb w e w ere
y
or b eing beaten beaten
blu e thou w astkfié“El? “a lso (
3°
you w ere
beaten b eaten
lJLe a; h e w as b eaten use
?u
’L’ b al e they w ere
beaten .
Tenses of th e past partic iple .
P ast
I w as b eaten gale rm w e w ere b eatenP
I
9
if thou w ast b eaten g a
ler: you w ere beaten
5)h e w as beaten
vi?“a le hf) they w ere
'
beaten .
P erfect.
I have b eenw“u
‘ f d j lfe Vb w e have b een
b eaten beaten
up Lf l Le
J; thou hast been 9 5
3? has) » f
;you have
beaten been beaten
umleg
i
ble a; h e h as beenof
”L; LUte a! )
they havebeaten been beaten .
P lup erfect.
Q5 ig lJLe W I h ad beenH5;a
gate rs w e h ad b een
b eatenybeaten
lg lsf lJLe ,3‘ thou hadst been
5563g 55l (
4 you h ad been
beaten beatenlei LgDie , 3, b e h ad been
Ltsq} Hf) " they h adbeen
beaten beaten .
62 D erivative Verbs.
or th e assertion m erely made in general'
terms,
. th e regu larformof th e passive is used i
; as, ch mard mard gayii, a man'has b een
beaten ; ’ and even this m ight be m ore idiomatically expressedby saying elc mard ne mar
(
ls/lad liai, " a man h as suffered abeating.
’
c . One cogen t reason w hy th e passive voice does not frequ entlyoccu r in H indu stani is
,that th e langu age ab ou nds w ith prim itive
simple verbs of a passive or neu ter signification, Which are ren
dered active by certain m odifications w hich w e are abou t to state.
Thu s Us, p a lna signifies to,
b e fed -or reared, ’ w hich again
becomes an active or transitive verb by lengthening th e vow elof th e root ; as, bib
, palm-
1,to feed orrear,
’as w ill be m ore fu lly
explained immediately .
D eriv ativ e Verbs.
43 . In H indu stan i a prim itive verb , if neu ter, is
rendered ac tive,as w e have j u st hinted , by certain
modifications of, or additions to ,its 1 oot . In like
manner, an ac tiv e verb m ay , by a process some w hatsim ilar, b e rendered c au sal or dou b ly transitiv e . Th e
princ ipal m odes in w hic h this m ay be effec ted are
comprised u nder th e follo w ingR u les.
1 . B y inserting th e long vow el l ii b etw een th e root and th ee
mi of th e infinitive of th e prim itive verb ,thu s, from Li ) palcnii,
a neu ter verb to grow ripe,3' to b e got ready ’
(as food), comesUK
‘; p altona (active), to ripen , or make ready, ’ to cook .
’
Again, this active verb may be rendered causal or dou b ly trange letter J w betw een th e root and th e mo
nation b l ana , thu s, from UK.»p akana, to make
insert th e letter w , and get th e cau sal form bl};pakw c
’
ina, to cause (another) to make (any thing) ready .
’ Toshew th e u se of th e three forms of th e verb , w e w ill add a. few
plain examples. 1.
95° L1.»UlgSkhana p alcta ha i, th e dinner
is (or being c ooke d- l-'K-3 1.3q j
ig—“f
D eriv ativ e“Verbs. 63
Midmatga'
r knanap akatc'
i li a i,"
th e servant is (himself) cookingdinner or 3 .
g” Ul
JQ' Ulgf J lAJlAYc mibmanda'
r klzc'
znii
pakw ata bai ,‘
th e host is cau smg dinner to b e cooked .
" Th eseexamples shew th e copiou sness of th e Hindustani verb as
compared w ith th e English . For w hereas w e are obliged «to
employ th e sam e verb both as'
neu ter and active , like th e w ord '
cooking ’
in th e first and second examples, th e Hindu stan i h asa distinct expression for each . And th e ill; p ukw ana in th e
last example i s m u ch m ore neat and concise than th e English is
having, ’ is getting, ’ or is cau sing t’h e dinner (to be) cooked .
’
In like manner, th e neu ter lzi>~ ja lna , to b urn ,ja liina, to kind le ,andja lmana, to cau se to be“kindled ; for example, batti ja ltiliai , th e candle b urns a man w ill say to h is servant
,batti ko
ja l'
ao, light th e candle (yourself), b u t h e may say to h ismunshi , batti koja lw iio ,
f cau se th e candle to be lit ’
(by others).2 . When th e root ofth e prim itive verb is a
,m onosyllab le w ith
any of th e long vow els l d, J 0 or it, and e or i , th e latter are
shortened in th e active and cau sal forms, that is, th e l of th e
root is displaced byfatlza ; th e J by samma , and th e by kasra
as,bfl>jagna, - to b e aw ake , UK? jagand, to
bo lna, to speak, Ulli ba lt'
z na , to call , UlJl: bu lw and, to cau se tob e called , to send for; so UJeg blzu lna, to forget, bl ; bli u lana,to m islead , b l}
;
blzu lw iina,to cau se to b e m isled ; L“ ! lotu a
,
to lie dow n , BU li tana,to lay dow n , UlJ’i l litw ana, to cau se to
b e laid dow n ; Li e bbigna, to be w et, Ulfy bb igana, to w et,
ilQ: blzigw ana , to cau se to be m ade w et. When th e vow elsou nd of th e root consists of th e strong diph th ongs J au
,
and d a i , these u ndergo no change, and consequ ently su chw ords fal l u nderR u le 1 ; as U}Jo dau rna , to ru n ,UlJ“Jo daurana
p a irna , to sw im ,mfg, p
airana . Th e verb be“ : baitlznd,t .to s1t, makes Neil; bitbana or b les s : bai tbana .
64‘
D eriv ativ e Verbs.
3 . A numerou s class of neu ter verbs, having a short vow el inth e last syllab le of th e root
,form th e active by changing the
short v ow el into its corresponding long that is,fatha b ecom es l ii
z amma becom esJ c>x< (or it) ; and kasra b ecomes d e (or i) ; as,
Ulu p a lna , to thrive or be nou rished,UlUp iilna, to nou rish ;
Ulékh u lnii, to Open (Of itse lf). ClJéklzo lna, to Open (any thing).These form th eirc au sals regu larly , according to R u le 1
,as, UlJlgf
kli u lw anii, to cau se (another) to Open (any thing).4 . A few verbs add Ull liinii to th e root, modified as in
0
R u le 2,thu s
,U6.“ si lt/ma, to learn , Ugh sikhana
,and Ullzif
sikblana , to teach ; Ulékh ana, to eat, Ullé klzilana, to feed ;
UJ.» sona , to sleep, Ulla su lana , to lu ll (asleep) , U6“; baitbna ,to sit, to b e placed, h as a variety Of form s
, v iz . bitlzana, ba i tit
ri nd, bitblanii, and ba itb lanii ; also baitltalnd and ba itbc
'
irnii, tocau se to sit, to set.5 . Th e follow ing are formed in a w ay pecu liar to them selves
UK: bikna,to b e sold
,US U becl ma, to sell ; h is) ralzna
'
,to
stay,UۤJ rakbna , to keep , or place ; UrJ: tu tna
, to b u rst,to be broken, U.J
.' torna , to break ; w e; clzb u tna , to cease ,
to go Off,U;J@> cb lzorna , to let Off, to let go ; Ui’igi pbatnc
’
z,
to b e rent, Ugly p lz iirnii, to rend ,UJQp butnii, to crack, or split,
”a: p lzorna , to b u rst open (actively).6. Verbs are form ed from su bstantives or adj ectives by addingUi and
,or Unc
'
r; as fromUiii pani , w ater, UUfi p aniyanii, to
irrigate: so from ljJé, w idfi
e,cbauriinii, to w iden . A few in
finitiv es spring, as H indu stani verb s, regu larly from Arab ic andPersian roots, by m erely adding Unii . If th e prim itive w ord h ea m onosyllab le ending w ith tw o consonan ts, afa tlza is inserted
4‘ Th e fo rm s 8 and 0 are by far th e m ost common ; th e i and it
comparative ly rare .
66 Compound Verbs.
p arti , h e fell dow n from off (or, as th e H indu stani h as it, morelogically, from up on) th e e lephant . ’
2 . P OT ENT I ALS, formed w ith UL.»saltnti,to b e ab le ; asUL: JJg
bo l-sa ltati , to be ab le to Speak, UL, jti -saltnti , to be ab le togo, &c . Th e root of a '
v erb in composition w ith suku ti in all its
tenses may b e view ed as a potential mood thu s, main bo l-saltttih im
,
‘ I am ab le to speak ,
’
or I can speak ; ’ so main bo l-saltti ,I cou ld speak .
’
3 . COM P LET I V ES, formed w ithU? cbuknti , to hav e done as
O P 9
Ufi? lei lritti -cltu ltnti , to hav e done eating, Ui v
> likit- cltuknti ,
to have finished w riting. Th e root of a verb w ith th e fu tu re Ofc lzu ltnti , is considered, very properly, as th e fu tu re perfect of su chroot ; thu s, jab main likb-cbuki
’
tngti ,‘
w hen I shall have donew riting, ’ that is, w hen I shall have w ritten , ’ p ostguam scripsero .
So,agar ma in liklz
-cbu ltti n,‘
if I m ay have w ritten , ’ si scrip serim.
I I . F rom tbc P resen t P articip le.
l . CONT INUAT I VES,as Ui>~ U9 bakttijti nti or Ur; UK:
baktti -ra ltnti , to continu e chatting. This i s not a legitimatecompou nd verb ; it is m erely a sentence , th e present participleal w ays agreeing w ith th e nom inative in gender and number
, as,
w u li mard ba lctti jti tti bai , that man goes on chatting w e mard
bakte jti te lia ir'
t,these m en go on chatting w u b randi bakti
jti ti h a i, that w oman goes on chatting .
2 . STAT I ST I C ALS : Ulyjlfgti te-ti nti , to come (in th e state of
(aone) singing ; jJa Ls
.” rote-daurnti, to run pry ing . Here th e
present participle al w ays rem ains in th e inflected state , like a su b
stantiv e o f th e third class, having some postposition u nderstood .
I I I . F rom th e P ast P articip le.
l . F R EQUENTAT I V E S : Ujf lJLe marti ltarnti , to make a praetice of beating ; Uj§ to m ake a practice of going .
2 . DES I D E R AT I VE S , as URL? )n bolti- cltti lznti , to w ish , or to
b e ab ou t, or like to speak .
IV . F rom Su bstantiv es or Adjectiv es, bence termed Nomina ls.
From Substantives, as from collection , Ujf t i?»
Compound Verbs.
jam’karnti
,to collect or bring together, and UJm t u g jam
’
Izonti , to b e collected or come together ; also from &UJE: g irota ,
a plunge, UJ le aUJé. glgota mti rnti , to dive , Ulé &U
JE g l w ta
ltlzti nti,to b e dipped . From adjectives, as from l-‘
jé? cit/i ota,
small,UU°
§ UJQ , clz lzotti
'
ltarna , to dim inish ; 1115 kti lti , b lack,Uj§ lllSkti lti karnti , to b lacken .
a . There is a very dou b tfu l kind of com pou nd cal led a re
iterative verb,said to b e formed by u sing together tw o verbs
regu larly conj u gated , &c .,asUll
v
> UlJ:bo lnti cltti ln ti ,
‘ to c onverse b u t th e u se Of these is generally confined to tenses of th epresent participle, or th e conj u nctive participle , and they are not
regu larly conj u gated , for th e au xiliary is added to th e last only,as w e bolte cba lte ba in, not bo lte ita iu clza lte ba in, they converse (chit-chat) together ; ’ so bo l—clzti l- ltar, not bo l-kar cba l
lcar,
‘ having conversed .
’ Those w hich are called Inceptives,Perm issiv es, Acqu isitives, &c .
, given in m ost grammars, are not
properly compou nd verbs, since they consist regu larly of tw o
verbs, th e one governed by th e other, in th e inflected form of th eInfinitive
,accord ing to a special ru le of Syntax ; as,
p
lflu
jf z
J
w u h bo lne lagti , h e began to say ; ’ q mlaud zJ
w u b Jti ne
detti h a i , h e gives (perm ission) to go ; ’ Lsb UUd b sJ w u li
jti ne p ti tti li ai, h e gets (perm ission) to all Of w hich ex
pressions are m ere sentences, and not compou nd verb s.
b . Hence th e compou nd verbs in th e H indu stani langu age are
really seven in number,v iz . : th e Intensive
,Potential, Comple
tive , Statistical, Frequ entative, Desiderative, a nd Nom inal . In
these, th e first part of th e compou nd rem ains u nchanged throu ghou t
,w hile th e second part is alw ays conj u gated in th e u su al
w ay. B u t am ong su ch of th e nom inals as are formed of an
adjective w ith a verb , the adj ective w ill agree in gender w ith th eObj ect of th e verb , u nless th e concord b e cu t off by J
§ lco .
Thu s .
JS 5326 gj
lf gti ri kbari kar, orJ§ MJS jl
f
gari Ito
c ag'
ti - ltar, stop th e carriage . In th e latter case on ly can th e
verb U} ljé kbag'
ti - ltarnti b e regarded as belonging to th e classof compou nds.
SECTI'
ON IV .
On th e I ndeclinable parts of Speech— Cardinal and
Ordinal Numbers— Deriv ation and Composition of
I . Adv erbs.
45 . TH E adverbs in Hindu stan i, like th e su b stan
tiv es, adj ec tives, and verb s, are to be acqu ired mainlyb y prac tice . Hence it w o u ld b e a m ere w aste of
spac e tosw ell o u r vo lume w ith a dry de tached list of
su c h w ords, w hich in all prob ab ility no learner w o u ld
ever peru se . W e shall therefore notice on ly thosew hich have any pec u liarity in their charac teror formation . As a general ru le , m ost adj ec tives may b e
u sed adverb ially w hen requ isite , as is th e case in
German , and o ften in Engli series of pu re Hind u stan i adverbs of frequ en t derived from fiv e of
th e prono u ns, h earing to r a sim ilar relation ,
as w ill be seen in th e fo l le . Dr. Gilchrist’spu pils w ill no dou bt reco l w hat pains th e
learned Doc tor u sed to imp them th e neces
sity Of learning this qu i series,”
or, as h e
c alled it, Th e ph ilolo
a . Adj ectives and adj ective pronou ns, w hen u sed adverb ially,remain u n inflected in th e simplest form ,
v iz . that of th e nom inab w l f
tive singu lar m ascu line ; as, db beg leg
-l w XJ
w u h babu t
aclccbb ti liklttti bai,
‘
h e w rites very w ell . ’ This is exactly th e ru lein German
,
‘
er sc lzreibt sehr gu t.’In th e follow ing serres,
accord ingly, numbers 5 , 6, and 7 , are merely th e adj ective or
indefinite pronou ns,formerly enumerated, employed as adverbs.
7 0 Adv erbsi
a . From th e first class w e have other adverbs rendered m oreemphatic by th e addition of
6° bi , &c . Thu s
g all abb i ,
ju st now , g askabbi , J(_5 ltabira , or
gm"; kadbi , ever, &c .
From th e second class, by changing Ul an intocf in
thu s, w yah in , exactly here, u p ; kab in, w hereabou ts
,
som ew here, &c . From th e fou rth, by adding cf” lzin , UfiJJ:
yin ibiri, in this very w ay, W ) J w itnbin, thereu pon , at thatvery time
, exactly, th e same as before, &c .
b . From among these m ay also b e formed , by m eans of
post-positions,&c . , a number of u sefu l compou nds as, $9 u i
ab talc, or ab talak, till now ; LL<3° c . , S lcab tak, tillw hen, &c .
u fi‘ g lcti blz
'
i kablzi,som etimes , u ;
a}
kabbi na kabbi , some time or other q 'uLl" Jab ti n talzti n ,
here and there ; u ,é Ule. jab ti n ltaliin, w herever ; w t; J Jl au r
lcabin, somew here else ; u p ; jab kabiti , w henever ; UJS
leg/ti n lcar, h o w ?
0 . A few adverbs of time have a tw ofold signification, pastor fu ture
,according to c ircumstances thu s
, JSIta l, to-m orrow ,
or yesterday ; u Juj i p arson , th e day after to-m orro w , or th e
day before yesterday ; UJwJ’
J tarson, th e third day from thispast, or to come ; UJaJJ narsan, th e fou rth day from this.
Th e tim e is restricted to past or fu ture by th e tenses of th e verband th e context Of th e sentences in w hich su ch w ords are fou nd .
d . Many adverb s occu r from th e Arab ic and Persian lan
gu ages ; as,lJla
‘
S ltaz ti rti (orJ lSLaS ltaz ti lciir), by chance , fromLi l lcaz ti
,fate
, &c .,and Prti
,th e sign of th e obj ective case ;
diJfa c li igu na , h ow ; & U> chanti ncbi , so that, like as J J
U
bti re, once , at last ; UbJUbti rb ti often (tim es) ; Ai l!» slttiyaa’,
perhaps (Hindu stani J»J : J» bo to bo , it m ay be) :l 20 5l
Mai lz na Li na/t, volens nolens, positively, at all events ; J
w a gli ttira , et cetera, 8Lc li dsfalgat, mere ly, finis.
P repositions. 7 1
e . Adverbs p urely Arab ic occu r chiefly as follow s : 1 . Simplya nou n w ith th e article ; thu s, ta sil a lltzssa (literally th e story
UaJxll a lg ltara z (literally, th e end, pu rport, ’ &c .) in short ;
Jls ll a lbti l (th e present), at this time cUJl a lbatta , certain ly ;&c . 2 . Th e Arab ic nou n in th e accu sative case , marked w ithth e termination l an (p . thu s, Uli i l i ttifti ltan, by chance
(from UUU‘
l i ttifti lc, fortune , acciden t, llc l aslan (or llo l
aslti ), by no means {Ut e mislan, for example (from Jiv e masa l
,
or misl, parab le, sim ilitu de) , laJa ; especially, &c .
Lastly, a nou n w ith a preposition ; as
, Jami l: bi lfi’
,l in fact ;
Jlsilzsi fi lbti l (in th e present), JJi ll fi’
lfaar (in th e beat),
all signifying, instantly, immediately ; M l; fi’
l bakiltat
(in tru th), really ; d u g, ya ,u i , that re to say, to w it, v iz .
f. Many adverb ial expressions occu r consisting of a pronou nand su bstantive governed by a simple postposition u nderstood ;
(ll, U ”) is taralt, in this m anner ; (Jig U‘S kis taralz, h o w ?
cL511“
) w tiste,w hy ? i . e . forw hat reason ? and so
on, w ith many other w ords of w hich th e adverbial u se is indi
cated by th e inflection of th e accompanying pronou n .
g . Th e plu perfect participle m ay also very often be elegantly
applied adverb ially; as, Jill.» banskar, laughingly, 1G)“ socii
kar,de liberately, from bansnti , to lau gh , U>Je s soc ltnti ,
to think/ as leg J u d usne barisltarkaltti ,‘
h e lau ghing (orhaving laug
hed) said .
’
I I . P rep osi tions.
46 . Th e prepositions in Hindu st are m ere su b
stantiv es in th e locative case , havi postpositionu nderstood and som etimes st of themare expressive of situ ation place , and
even to
7 2 P repositions.
abstrac t ideas. Hence as su b stan tives, they all gov ernth e genitive c ase , those of them w hich are mascu line
(form ing th e m aj ority) requ ire th e w ord w hich theygovern to have th e postposition
L55 Ice after it ; as,
Ufi é o
fmard be age, before th e m an ,
’
literally,‘
in ffont Of th e m an ;’
w hile those that are femininerequ ire th e w ord they govern to have
cf lei , as
,
u'
JlaUS shaltr lti taraf ,
‘ tow ards th e c ity ,
’
literally ,
‘
in th e direc tion of th e c ity .
’ I t is optional topu t th e preposition b efore or after th e nou n w hic h itgoverns ; thu s in th e forego ing example w e m ighthave said tige mard Ice, or mard ke tige, w ith equ alproprie ty .
Th e follo w ing is an alphabetical list .Of m ascu line prepositionsrequ iring th e nouns w hich they govern to have th e gen itive w ithIce, for reasons explained in th e beginning of th e Syn tax .
age, before, in front ” Up ti s, by, near
JAB) andar, w ithin , inside “fi r
s -
lp i c/l ite, b ehind, in th e
rear
h”
si.3 tale, u nder, beneath
J—Ul zip ar, above , on th e top
a ll ba’
is, by reason of
“f lat baJ'
ti e,instead o f
" ta m , to“
9b : badle,orJA:bada l,instead (J
); li tu rg , W ith OUt ou tsrde
UJAJ bidti n
, w ithou t, except uL'j)
‘ dar-miyan, betw een ,
1 3n barti bar, equ al to , oppoamong
site to ,elile sti tb, w ith (in company)
barti e,for, on accou nt of w )“ 3577111723 ; before
Ax: ba’
d, after (as to time) c.
,-any
» sabab, by reason
fix; baglta ir, w ithou t, except i
f,
" si w a or sz w ae , except
U4bin, U: binti , w ithou t eff
’iw as, instead , for
bi clr, m or among M ltabl, beforeif
/
J‘i p ti r, over (other side) Icari b, near
7 4 Conjunctions.
Persian prefixes are occasional ly employed w ith w ords fromth ose langu ages.
J’
l az,from ,
by &c w e,u pon , above
ill i lla, except, besides u:
’
an, fromL1 ba
, w ith (possessed of)’ind
,near
, w itha: or .»ba (or bi), in, by o ff
i , in
u” be
, w ithou t (deprived of) ha, according to, like
1: bar
,on
,in, at J la or li, to, for
rid/J bare-
te, for(on accou nt of) to ma
’
,w ith
bi le'
i, w ithou t (sine) d :min, from .
,o dar
,in
, w ithin
I I I . Conju nctions.
47 . Th e c onj u nc tions have no pecu liarity ab o u tthem w e shall therefore add a list of th e more u sefu lof them in alphab e tical order.
(a
&Lajl a z bas-ki
,since, for as
m u ch as
f l agar,Kgar, ifagarc/zi, although
LBl amma'
,bu t
,m oreover
JJl 6m , and, alsoail.) ba lki, bu t, on th e con
trary
bh i , also, indeed
J i p ar, b u t, yet
un i p as, thence , therefore
,3‘
to,then
u ntil, w hile
f jo, if, w hen&QTJl>bal-anki, w hereas, not
w ithstandingxi} Mfifi, either, orA§ ki
, that, becau se, than4.5L? taki, that, in that
&75 kyi
'
tnki , becau selg; gag/a, as ifas; go - Ici, althou gh
ufJ lekin, b u t
12" magar, except, u nless
,3'
wnabin- to, otherw ise
J ?" ni z , also, like w ise
I nterjections.
— Nu merals.
I
j10a, and r
m liam,also, llke se
J ,w ar, for, J
?
)w a-
gar, and if“in” bare/rand, althou gh ,
w ar-na, and if not,banaz , yet
u nless b ya, or, either.
IV . I nterjeé’
tions.
'
48 . These scarcely deserve th e appellation of a
part of speech w e shall therefore c ontent ou rselvesby enumerating a fe w of comm on occ u rrenc e .
Oahu. shabiisk (i. e . O
i l; skad bask, happiness or goodlu ck to you g
if t afrin (b lessings on you ), si) bl
) w all w a/i
(adm irab le L5 kya kh u b (h ow excellentUs.)god
d lzan-i dban (h ow fortu nate L5?" w ah J z , u
mm l: LS kya
bat bai (w hat an affair all express j oy , adm iration, and en
couragem ent, like bravo . w ell done .
" &c . B u t “a g a l.»bap re
(0 father), astonishing ! dreadful .
" lbof Lab bae Izae, or
viaL5“ba i bai , 4 5._s l) w ae w ae, g
i
l w a’
e w ai la, alas,
alas ! alackaday ! w oes me .
" u bat,gig
} ch ili cb/zi,
tu sh, pshaw ,pish , fie fie !
’
Jo du r, avau nt !’ express sorrow
,
contempt, and av ersmn . kasi a i , ) l o, Oh “59 re or 4) are
,
holla you . are u sed in calling attention . th e tw o last in a
disrespectfu l w ay. re (m .) or J ) ri (f) agrees in genderw ith th e obj ect of address ; as, L535; launde re, you boy .
5 9 41
A); lau nd i ri , you girl !’X
Numera ls .
49 . I n page 42 w e gave th e first ten numerals, and
w e now add th e rem ainder up to a hu ndred . Frac
tically speaking, they are all irregu lar in the ir forma
tion , thou gh it w ou ld no t b e very difficu lt to ac c ou n tfor th e seem ing irregu larity on sou nd e tym o logical
princ iples. This how everw ou ld notgreatly b enefit th estuden t , w h o m u st in th e mean tim e learn them byheart as soonas h e can .
FIGUR ES . NAMES .
w igs
- talk
cbba ttis
sa trab sairitis
atbara/z
chalis f
iktalis
tétal is
Fa 8't
lc '
l 8§H R? ckfiifi fis
Fv 89
FA 3 :
Fl gas “ lavi ’l u ncbas
M tis b’
10
w k“; p acbas
Numeralsl
FIGUR ES .,
NAMES . NAMES .
Arab I nd .
91 1 1 al l ikanaw'
é
92 (if & R b gy lg banaw E
93 11”
L ? tiranaw e
94 81° L 8 cbauranaw é
95 10 L 1 gj lag; p acbanaw é f sau orL5
. »sa i
a . Some of these have namesi
slightly differing from th e
preceding, w h ich w e here subj oin
gyarab 51 “filmEkiiw an 85
u‘AS li p ancbiisi
18 lJlggl atbara 54
cfil"? cbaup an 86file—3 cbbasi
19 u nnis ujlg ; p acbdw an 90 a; nau w ad
21 M l Ekis 6 1 Eksath 91 q y lfi l Ekanaw é or
3 1 w‘figl Ektis 66 d a e
le? ch hach lzat ikanau w é
(a
33 M taintis or g a gg cbba - satb. 92 953k»banau w é or
34 W ); chauntis 68 arsat/z birc'
inaq
38 art'
is Ekbattar 93 gfii tiranau 'w e
7 3 jib/0
3°
tirbattar 95 g y léi
lg’ panclzanaw z
41Ugm léktans 7 6 cbba- Ii a ttar 96 ckbc
’
inaw e
43V i ki}taintc
'
ili s 81q jlfi l Ekc
'
isi 99 naufinaw e.
46u-eil’fi? cbbatali s 82 bas
'
i or or gy li
48 A U) ortali sL3
.31); birc
'
is'
i
gsf lgeg cbbifi naw'
é
4 9h ; satanaw e
gj lyu
l atbanaw é
“5l ninanaw é0
Fractional Numbers. 7 9
a .
“Th e numbers above one hu ndred proceed somew hat likeou r o w n , only th e conj u nction is generally su ppressed ; as,
J.» Cfigl eh sau panch , one hundred (and) five; U“)
j»:,o
do sau das, tw o hu ndred (and) ten , &c . Th e present year,1846
,m ay b e expressed as w ith u s
, w all—e? 32>+1 1 J lJ
‘
m i s»)
elc baz ar atb sau ch bifi lis, or ” Alfie? j; yly l albaralz sau
ch lzi , iili s ; that is, one thou sand eight hu ndred, &c .,or eighteen
hu ndred , &c .
b . Th e follow ing are u sed as collective numb ers
ii i? 80 7415, a four l”“
I
a hundredbaz ci r, a thou sand
45? ldkb , a h u ndred thou sand
” Jf f aaror, one hu ndred lakbs,or ten m illions.
gal? gabi , a fiv e
kori , a scoreLu lla cbc
'
z l i sii,a forty
c . Th e ordinals proc eed as follow slid pah lfi orpabila, ckau tbd, 4th
li-rsz
‘174 57215, w
lfléli panch w znz, 5th
b e" dfisrfi, 2nd £9536? cbhatw an,6th 8: c .
ba ns; tisrii, 3rd cbbatha,
Th e seventh and u pw ards are regu larly formed from th e
Cardinals by th e addition ofwl) w as. Th e Ordinals are all
su bject to inflection like adjectives in l a or (i ii, that is, a
becom es e for th e ob liqu e mascu line, and i for th e fem inine .
In like m anner, as becomes en and in.
d . Fractional Numbers.
39. 195130 ,
cbau t/z ,
d ies}; chau tlzafi,
UJi pau n,
Bxp au nd,
sa lad, I i ,quarter
cleric, ls
g imp arhafi,zé
80 D eriv ation , 8ya , of Words.
In the u se of th e fractional numbers, a few pecu liarities occu r,w hich it w ill be w ell to notice ; thus, “xii i p au
ne, w hen prefixedI
to a number,signifies a qu arter less than that number ,
lja
sa w a, a qu arter m ore ; sarbe, one h agm ore,
’
&c . To
th e collective numb ei s for ahu ndred, a thousand', &c .,they are
Isim ilarly applied ; thu s, ,
3
pau ne sau , 7 5 ; j . » l) » saw a
sau ,= 125 . Th e w ords clerk and arb iifi denote m u ltipl ication ;
as, JD“a}; clerk h a z e—ir
, 150 x fli ng i ngarbdfi baz iir, 2500
,or (100
a I
e . It w ill b e seen then , that a manageinent of th en umerals
,w hole and fractional
,is no easy matter. Th e sure
plan is to commi u p to 100. As a
check u pon th 1s th e learrier first tenwand th e
m u ltiples of 10,
if h e i s not qu ite
certa in occu rrence), for ex
ample{lbI»U” ; tis p ar
gau ck, fiv e
g er h im get the first tw enty thoroughly,and then thu s
,1s ek from p an
p age sci entific mode is, o fflb ou rsle, to carry th e
hundred numerals 1n h is head, and be qu ite independent .
\
w ith derivative w ords
gn importation . Thosesingle w ords modified
the grammaticalPersian , on th e
are free ly b orb u t also a pou nds, for th e
formation of w hic h th e Persian langu age h as a pec u liaraptitude , and to th e numb er of w hich there is no lim it .I n like m anner, com positions in th e H indi d ialec tabou nd in Sanskrit w ords, b o th derivative and c om
po u nded ac cording to th e gen iu s of that h ighly c u ltiv ated language . Henc e , in order to kno w H industan i
82 D eriv ativ es.
(a 0 0
A» to Jau a horse- sh oe sl xs na’
lband,a farrier
a torch masb’
a lcbi , a torch-bearerland ja ww
'
)z amin dar, a landholder
hi) iron J lajl lobar, a b lacksm ithA: h ad 443: badkar, an evil- doer
J; gold
f?) z argar, a goldsm ithi t
? crime ) l>/
(3l gunak-
gar, a sinner
M l hope Jljéw o l ummedw ar
,an expectant
Jo door
uljjo darw an
,a porter
A57
, army $n sip alzi , a soldier.
Nouns denoting th e M eans or I nstrument.
52 . These sign ify th e thing b y w h ich th e ac tionmay b e perform ed , and are derived from verbal r ootsby aflixing
c)as rolling UL): belan, a rolling-
pin
U(o)playing h is, ramnd, a park
L353
15 clipping 6 151
5 katarni, a pairof scissars
3 5l§> sw eeping jbiirit, a broom .
O thers are formed from nou ns, by affixing
Jl as an hou r gh ariyii l, an hour-be lla}! e m
f-o th e hand ai l-ai d dastana
,aglove
Cff'
i" ? th e eye Cl u st e ch asbmak, spectacles
c l a d th e hand w e dasta , a handle .
Nou ns denoting P lace or Situation .
53 . These are form ed partly b y u n iting tw o nou ns
together, and also by adding certain term inations ; as,
Th e term inatio ns dlz' r, bc'
iz , and pe rhaps a fe w m o re,requ ire
th e no u n to b e inflec ted, if o f th e third c lass ; as, maz eddr, taste fu l,{battbe-bdz
,a jeste r.
D eriv ativ es.
alif a city Haidar
q jl
k ill a garden Ajay, a flow er
” 3 a city “35l Ghaz i
Jl)
‘
m u ltitude all a tu lipJla orlll.» a place 535 a horse
la.» a place a grave
wit a place a rose
aslfs
a place
Jf" city Kishn
Abstracts.
54 . Ab strac t nou ns are formed chiefly from adjectiv es, by affixing some term ination , of w hich th e follow ing are of comm on occ u rrence
l to[if w arm be); garmd, w arm w eather
{5 little
L536 kamt
'
i,deficiency
[b
lSjl a child US) larak-p an, childhood
sw eet m itbas, sw eetness
L; fiw
Ufreshof)“tiiz agi , freshness
0 0 ,
L9 ” Jl high . ls3}l i'
mcb iin, height
U; l}: b ad
wi lf bura ,i , badness
ai ds ljjg b itter w igskarw abat, b itterness.
To Arab ic nouns u is generally added to form abstracts as,
,
hukm; a command, c a mp llu kiimat, dom inion ; so(As ?
ll ajjdm, a barber, ll ajjamat, shaving. A few abstracts are
83
d bl-
J» [laidar-abiid , th e
city of Haidar
“55l p h itl
- w ari , a flow e rgarden
J; G'h az
'
ip u r, th e cityof Ghaz i
JlJAll! la la z ar
,a tu lip bed
"Hf/é; gh u r
- sii l,a stab le
djs {cabr-istan, a bu rying
-
grou nd
eJI
‘J-fi
ga l-sban , a roseb ow er
slf lTdrum-
gab , a resting
-place
fl uff K isbn-nagar, th e
to w n ofKrishna.
84 D eriv ativ es .
formed by a repetition of th e w ord,w ith a slight alteration in
th e last ; as+3: jbu tb -mu tb , falsehood .
55 . Th e verb al nou n deno ting th e ac tion (in pro
gress) is generally expressed by th e Infin itive . Th e
ac tion , in th e ab strac t , is frequ ently expressed by th em ere root ; as, JJg bol, Speech , ai l? clziih , desire , &c .
O thers are formed from th e roo t by adding c ertain
term inations ; as,l to
q; speak RS kaba, a saying:sl so w bo
,d,i , a sow ing
u ! 4 0 mildp , a m ixing or u nion
val drink u 'l; p ig/as, desire to drink , thirstu
i
ul" know (Pers.) J ld diinisb , know ledge
ub u rn
UL? j
a lan,a b urning
lJ
l'LG-f deceive lJlle bli u law a, a deception
Cb) ls “ prepare Cl g"sajaw at, preparation
L”Si/
l dgi feed d ill/Q5kb i la'
,i , a feedingis call M ia bu tt
-
that, a calling.
D iminu tiv es .
56 . These are formed from o ther nou ns, by addingto them variou s term inations ; as,
l tov
i.) a dau ghter
L5 ?or a? a cau ldron
J J"
a b edsteadO. I
$7 ) a cannon
L2 : baa/a,a little daugho
ter
sin.»degcbi , a kettle
p a langri , a smallbedstead
C5: 33 top ak, a m u sket
Bo} . marditfi ,a little
contemptib le man
86 D eriv ativ es.
Adjectiv es.
58 . Adj ec tives are formed from su b stantives by th eaddition of certain terminations, m ost of w hich w ill b efou nd in th e follow ing alphab etical list the irordinarym ean ing w ill b e ob viou s from th e vario u s examples ;thu s, by adding
to £86? hu nger
fidelityforeign cou ntry w iJ w i lc
'
zya t- z ii,
Jl.s a mou n tain
J ; do th e heart
ri sorrow
1 orJl behind
w ealth
t;
J w rll:
to fu ? w ood
116556? bhakha, hungry«fi lli l: tifldna, childish
J, lJJJz or- Ziw ar
,strong
MJhgzo lzatbyar- band
,arm ed
J ldBJ w afd - dar, faithfulforeign
born
Ja n); kob -sar
,m ou ntainou s
d il-gir, grieved
1. 1e g fiam-
gi n, sorrow fu lfirs t p ic/Wi ld, hindermost
dau lat-mand, w ealthylJJo dii na
'
,dou b le
bau l—nc’
zk, terrib le
Jc xjd d i diirii , sightlysag
- w ei r, grievou s
Jrel!» ndm- w ar, renow ned
£3d do -sdla, b iennialbaz ari
,of th e market
dantel,tu sked
cbobi n, w ooden .
fo lifc
'
tm and U)!gu n are added to w o 1ds to denote colour ; as,
Deriv ativ es.
o I
fsli u lJ i sJ z a
’
fariin—fam, saffron-colou red , u )? ni l-gitu , b lu ecolou red . ll; konii and i s; goska are added to num erals toexpress th e figure of things; as, liJgjé cbau -konc
’
z , qu adrangu lar,is; Us: slzasb -
gosba , hexagonal, &c .
u ") w ash andJlJ w iir
are added to express likeness ; as, Q‘
Jgbark-w ash , like light
ning, Jl,
«£3l mardiina-w izr, like a brave m an .
a . Many adj ectives are formed by prefixing certain w ords ;as follow s
wl to leigp seen lgfigéil andeklzii, u nseenb li
J tru st liJ lg bii-w afd , tru sty
patiencefl at? be-sabr, im patient
(,li a name
(g lib; bad - niim,
infamou spresent g ii a ir
-bag ir, absentw isdom Ji n n—9A
? Mi ldf’
algl, foolish
r
i
g fortuneb
kam -balcfit, u nfortu natell 8
Jl> help slg
- ll ld- cb iira , helplessl) pleased U
i
Jzi lJ nc
'
z-kh uslc, displeased
(m age J
i lin: bam-’
umr,coeval .
59 . In c onc lu ding ou r remarks on thederivation of“
w ords, w e w ou ld particu larly direc t th e stu den t ’satten tion to th e variou s u ses of th e term ination 4 ,
i .
I t .may b e added to alm ost every adj ec tive of th e
langu age , simple or compou nd , w hich then b ecom es
th e c orresponding ab strac t su b stan tive . 2 . I t m ay b e
added to all su b stantives deno ting c ou ntry , c ity ,sec t ,
trib e , ph ysical su b stances, &c ., w h ich then b ecom e
adjec tives, sign ifying , of or belong ing to,or formed
from , &c. , th e primary su b stantive . Lastly . I t is u sedin form ing fem inines from masc u lines ; and it is th e
charac teristic of th e feminine gender in all present andpast partic iples, as w ell as in all adj ec tives pu re lyI ndian ending in l a.
88 Compounds.
Compound Words .
60 . In all w orks w ritten in th e Urdu or m ixed dialec t of H indu stan i , a vast nu mb er of com po u nd w ords
from th e Persian m ay b e m et w ith in alm ost everypage . These are generally form ed by th e u n ion of
tw o su b stan tives, or ofan adj ec tive w ith a su b stan tive .
Many of them are given in dic tionaries, b u t as thereis no lim it to the ir numb er, th e stu den t m u st not
place m u ch relianc e on that sou rc e . A few w eeks’
stu dy of Persian w ill make th e m atter c learer thanany b ody of ru les w e cou ld lay dow n on th e su bj ec tw e shall therefore no tice here on ly th e m ore im portant c om pou nds, referring th e stu den t for fu rther information to o u r Persian Gramm ar, ed it . 1844 .
Su bstantiv es.
a . A Persian or Arab ic su bstantive w ith its regimen is of
frequ ent occu rrence in Hindu stani ; as, m l; u l db- i -baiyc
’
zt,
w ater of imm ortalityut
ili zing? d i da, i-diinisb ,
‘
th e eye of
discernm en t ; ’ n
/J'
ggv
y
rit-e- z amin, th e face of th e earth .
’
In
a sim ilar form a Persia n su bstan tive w ith its adj ective occasionally occu rs as, J
Qfi e mard- i-nikii , a good m angi lé(AL:
’ti lam- i-fi n
'
i,
‘
th e perishab le w orld .
’ These, w hen introdu cedinto Hindu stani, are view ed as single w ords, and form their variouscases by adding th e post-positions like nouns of th e first or
second classes ; as, c'
ib- i- [zaiyiit kit, fib- i—ba iydt se, &c .
b . A num erou s class of Compound Substantives is formed byth e m ere j u xtap osition of tw o nou ns ; as
,asls.
“5?i bdw ar
ch i -Mano , cook-hou se , or kitchen , ’ from “ff-Li? cook,
’and
0
ai l; a hou se so , alf
‘.JJ
ra z m-
gc’
zb, th e battle-field,
’ froml.)J
contest, ’ and all?"
a place in like manner,alsi jab iin
paniilz ,‘
th e asylum of th e w orld , ’ i. e .
‘th e royal personage , ’
fromwk?? th e w orld
,
’and slag, refuge so ,
M l)J
‘
JJ roz -niima,
a day-book
,
’
a ll o fi irad- u dma, the book of w isdom ,
’
&c .
90 Adjectiv es.
w ork of th e langu age . 3rd . Tw o w ords having something ofalliteration abou t them ,
or a sim ilarity ofrhyme ; as, first) mm)hurly b u rly , ’ JJJ
‘
JJta u proar
,
”
J§>
Ji m trickery
,
’
&c . al l of
w hich w e shou ld of cou rse vote to b e vu lgarisms,on ly that they
occur in th e very best w riters. L astly,th e Hindu stani is parti
c u larly rich in im itative sou nds, su ch asu ? w e?
‘ j ingling,’
u Us simmering .
’
f. Arab ic phrases, su ch as w e described m p . 19 (No . are
occasionally met w ith , su ch as ca b l ing
w th e Cau ser ofcau ses, ’ God ,’ &c . ; bu t w e believe that all su ch are explainedin good dictionaries.
a . A very num erou s class of epithets is formed by th e u nion49
of tw o substantives as, (J
al l lala‘ having cheeks like
5f
th e tu lip J JJ J) ; par? 7'
1'
2,e orpar? 772, having th e face of a
fairy ; dd éfi; sang di l, having a heart like stone u psh akar lab, having lips (sw eet) as sugar. In English w e havem any instances, in th e m ore fam iliar style , of this kind of compound as, iron-hearted , ’ b u ll-headed,’ lynx-eyed, ’ &c .
6. Another numerou s class, sim ilar to th e preceding, is form ed7
by prefixing an adj ective to a su bstantive ; as, J JJ n . [ch u b
rii ,e, having a fair face ,
’
J l d b p ak ra,e, of pu re inten
J.) tang di l, distressed in heart . ’ W e make u se
ofmany su ch compou nds in fam iliar conversation and new spaperstyle , su ch as c lear-sighted , ’
‘ long-headed , ’ sharp-w itted, ’hard-hearted , ’ &c .
0 . Perhaps th e most numerou s class of th e epithets is thatcomposed of verbal roots, j oined to substantives or adjectives ;
J ; (, c’
[z lam gir, w orld-subdu ing grill and fitna angaz ,
strife-exc iting LTul? jén asa , giving rest to th e sou l ;
I
J.»dil si tan , ravishing the heart ,J is ,»su bu lc rav ,
Compounds.
m oving lightly .
’
Our best English poets frequ ently indu lge incom pou nds of this class thu s
,th e night-tripping fairy, ’ th e
temple- hau nting m artlet,’ th e clou d-compelling Jove,’ &c .
d . Aknow ledge of these Persian compou nds w ill b e ab solu telynecessary, in order to peru se w ith any advantage th e finest produ ctions of th e Hindu stani langu age . Th e poets in generalfreely u se su ch terms ; nor are they of less frequ ent occu rrencein th e best prose w orks, su ch as th e B ag lt o B ah t
-
tr, th e I ze_h
w an u s,§ afa , th e K h irad Afroz , &c .
,for th e thorough u nder
standing of w hich,a slight know ledge of Persian is ab solu tely
requ l s1te . In proof of this w e cou ld point ou t many compou ndsw hich occu r in ou r o w n selections from th e K/z irad Afroz , not
to b e found in any d ictionary, th e m eaning at th e sam e tim e
being Qu ite obviou s to any one w h o know s Persian . Su ch ,for example , are L
V.’
(bf markam bah t},
‘medicine m oney ; ’
win nafas kush z , m ortifying of th e passions ’
.
ClJ
. o
“(c
sufi miz oj , of philosophic disposition , ’ vide story 14th , p . 51 .
e . W e may reckon among th e compounds su ch expressionsas gab to ma bap , parents, ’JJ¢§ lar-kapz
'
l r—Lar and Kapur,
names of tw o brother m instrels w h o lived at th e cou rt ofAkbar.
I t is barely possib le that this m ay be an im itation of th e San
skrit compou nd called dw andw a thou gh th e probab ility is infavou r of its b eing an idiom atic om ission of th e conj u nction
JJl
‘
and,
’be tw een tw o su ch w ords as are u su ally considered to be
associated together. In w orks pu rely Hindi, originally translated from th e Sanskrit
,su ch as th e P rom Sagar, it is m ost
likely that su ch phrases as Mr s? A33 nandajasoda, Nandaand Jasoda
(bl-3 UR} krisfina—ba larc
'
im,Krishna and B ala
ram,
’
are bondfide dw andw as ; bu t it w ou ld savour of pedan tryto apply th e term to su ch hom ely expressions as “Ki/o L5
53)bread and b u tter, ’ or th e v ery u n- c lassica l beverage commonlycal led d ’i J ets
}; videlicet, brandy and w ater.
’
SECTION V .
Syntax’
, or Constra’
ction of Sentences.
6 1. I N all langu ages a simple sen tence m u st necessarily consist of three parts : l st, a nom inative or
subj ec t ; 2 u d , a verb ; and 3rd , a predicate or attri
b u te ; as, fire is h o t,
’ ‘
ice is c old .
’
I n many instancesth e verb and attrib u te are inc luded in one w ord ; as,
th e man sleeps, ’ ‘
th e horse ru ns, th e sno w falls, ’
in
w h ich case th e v erb is said to b e neu ter or intransitive .
W hen th e verb is expressive of an ac tion , and at th e
same time th e sense is incomple te w itho u t stating th eobj ec t ac ted u pon , it is called an ac tive or transitiveverb , as, th e c arpenter m ade a tab le
,
’-
th e masons
b u ilt a chu rch .
’
In each o f these sentences it is ev i
den t that som e thing is requ ired b eyond th e verb to
com plete th e sense,for if w e m erely said
‘
th e c ar;
penter m ade,
’ ‘
th e masons b u ilt , ’
th e bearer w ou ld
instan tly ask‘m ade W hat ?’ b u ilt W hat In Hin
du stan i and se veral of its kindred dialec ts, it is of th e
u tmost importanc e that th e learner shou ld discrim inateth e ac tive or transitive from th e neu ter or in transitiveverb , in order that h e m ay adopt that m ode of c on
stru c tion pec u liar to each . In a sen tence w hose verbis ac tive or transitive
, w e shall designate th e threeparts as agen t , verb , and obj ec t ; thu s th e carpenter
is th e agent, made th e verb and a table th e obj ec t .
a . In th e arrangement of th e three parts of a sentence,d ifferen t langu ages follow ru les pecu liar to themselves ; forinstance, in th e sentence, ‘
th e elephant.
killed th e tiger,’ th eLatin, Greek, and Sanskrit langu ages hav e th e Option of arranging th e w ords in any order. Th e Arab ic and th e Gaelic pu tth e verb first, then th e nom inative, and fastly th e object. Th e
English and French follow th e logical order as w e have j u stgiven it, and th e H indu stani and Persian have also an arrange
94 Concord of Adjectiv es.
Concord of Adjectiv es w ith Su bstantiv es.
63 . Th e adj ec tive , as in English , generally prec edesits su b stan tive ; if th e adjec tive b e capab le of inflec
tion , that is, if it b e a pu rely Indian w ord ending in
i ii , th e follow ing ru le holds : Th e term ination l a is u sedb efore all mascu line nou ns in th e nom inative (or firstacc u sative) case singu lar ; b efore m ascu line nou ns in
any o ther c ase singu lar, or in th e plu ral numb er, th eterm ination J e is u sed ; and b efore all feminine nou ns,in any c ase , sing
u lar or plu ral , th e term ination J 2
is u sed ; thu s, Us lie; sJw uh bird lZi mard h ai , h e is
a good man , ( J G
LA: bilale mard se, from a good(a
man , of J
ie bizale mard,‘
good men ,
’
up; glee
bhalemordon se, from good m en ,
’
wJJ
: 3 4?Matt’
au rat,
a good w oman ,
’
Kw J
JJJ: bhati namn
/
on1rd , &c . , of
good w omen .
’
” I
a . Th e same ru le applies to su ch adj ectives in u l an and - 25 a ,
as admit of inflection as, {so l u O
‘
th e tenthu .b1a
c
ofth e tenth m an,
’m l) tenth n ight ; ’ so , I ii” : ral-”
S Q
th e helpless traveller, ’ Jf I ii.“ Jl s g‘ to th e helpless traveller, ’
$59) JJigs;‘
th e helpless qu een .
’
b . If adj ectives, capab le of inflection, be separated by meansof th e particle JS from th e nou n w hich they qu alify, and
;
u nitedw ith th e verb, they u ndergo no change ; as, JJSMgJf “
it: ég l
b lacken h is face ’
; bu t in this sentence kala karna 18 to bereckoned a compou nd verb (p . 67 , b). Adj ectives, ending w ithany letter except ,
l s,and .u
i,restricted as above, do not u nder
go any change ; as, f
at d b a pu re man ,’C
‘
JJJ: fi fU a
pu re w oman,
’
J.» al l.»U an unclean thing .
’
0
e . As a general ru le , adj ectives, w hen follow ed by their su b
Genitiv e Case. 95
stantiv es, never receive th e nasal term inations (Ziii , eii , or on) ofth e plural ; and th e sam e ru le applies to su ch tenses as are
formed of participles w ith or w ithou t an au xiliary verb , it be ingdeemed su fficient to add th e nasal ii to th e last w ord only ; as,
M US& l achch l fi (not ach cbh i’
dfi) kitébeii ,‘
good books
J ux‘ STL944 blia le (not bhalori) Eidmiyofi ne,
‘by good men ; ’
a re}
L15 1; L5
35a)? J , w e chali jc
'
iti rakt'
i tfi'
i ii,
‘ they
(females) continu ed going along . Sometimes, how ever, th e
participle takes th e plural termination ; as, u
se wig}? and
wevii}extr. p . 28 . When th e adjective comes last (w hich
may happen m verse) it sometimes receives th e plu ral term ination as, u
tijlééufi l)heavy (tedious) nights.
’
(Yates'
s Gr.)
d . If an adj ective qu alifies tw o or m ore nouns,some mascu
line , some fem inine , th e adjective is u sed in th e mascu line form ,
and th e same ru le applies to th e participles and fu tu re tenses of
verbs ; as, ufb J f
a u Ulo éfl l h is mother and father are
de ad ;’ Leg114 ml); ,S LS
M e
gs“ ; q l v
ei l h e seeing h is son
and daughter dead , said, ’ &c . I f, how ever, th e substantives b enames of inanimate things, th e adj ec tive generally agrees w iththat to w hich it
;
stands nearest ; as in th e follow ing sen tence,
o r;w e,“ w e w elzi” l w le g}? th e clothes, plates and
books are very good .
’
Concord of the Genitiv e, w ith its reg imen, &c .
64 . W e have seen (p . 2 7 , &c .) that th e genitivec ase h as three distinc t term inations, kit, Ice, and lei ,and th e ru le w hich determ ines th e cho ic e of these ise xac tly sim ilar to that w hich regu lates th e term inationof th e adj ec tive ; in fac t, all gen itives in H indu stan iare possessiv e adjectiv es, subjec t to inflec tion , and , like
adjec tives, they are generally placed b efore th e su b
stantiv e w h ich governs them . I f th e governing w ord
96 Genitiv e Case .
b e masc u line and in th e nom inative case (or first formof th e ac c u sative) singu lar, lS kit
"
is u sed , as, J ?”45 of
mard kit gh ar,‘
th e man’
s hou se ,
’
or‘
th e ho u se of th e
m an ,
’
u”Jlo
'
L5 U”
00
4 0 mard kit kattit w af d diir h ai,‘
th e
m an’
s dog is faithfu l ,’
)l'o M LS K c} mard lea ku tto
mat moro , do n ot beat th e m an’
s dog .
’ I f th e governing w ord b e m asc u line and in an ob liqu e case singu lar,
or in any case p lu ral , 5 Ice is u sed , as,L5
» :j g
.)
95 of
mard ke ghar se, from th e man’
s hou se , ’
,Sw ) ? 5 c
f
mard Ice gbaw u ko , to th e m an’
s hou ses.
’
Lastly , if
th e -
governing w ord b e fem inine , in w hatever case or
numb er, 3 lei 1s u sed ; as, c g“? L5 mard lei beti , th e
man’
s dau ghter,’
va lz§ 5 mard Ii i kitiiben ,
‘th e
oo /
man’
s b ooks.
’
a . Althou gh th e general ru le is to pu t th e genitive casebefore its regimen , yet th e reverse is of frequ ent occu rrence , particu larly in su ch w orks as have b een translated or im itated fromth e Persian ; as, é u
.» M th e thraldom ‘
of th e body, ’
lg51; ads “ th e w orsh p of thanksgiving .
’ W e m ay here statethat th e Persian genitive is formed by placing th e governingw ord first, having its last letter m arked w ith th e vow e l Icasra ;as
, ufi loCfganj-i-ddnish , th e treasury ofw isdom ,
’
w here th eshort vow el i is th e sign of th e genitive , sim ilar in its u se to ou r
particle of in English . Persian w ords ending w ith 8‘
and J ,
take 5
and those ending w ith l or J take J for th e’
sign . of th eI5
.
0I
gen1t1v e as, i.h m» a servant of God , ’ J ac je
air of th esea .
’
6. Th e genitive sign is employed idiomatica lly in su ch expressions as W K 9 » su b kit sab, one and all
,
’ M lsc . , -fi g
kbet kit kh et, th e w hole (field) of th e field, ’ w Ugs c ab bai tIci bai t
,
‘
mere talk and adjectiv ely to convert a su bstantive
98 P repositions.
sincere friendsh ip .
’Th e editors of a recent Calcu tta edition
have made an amendment here , by u smg kamarz tumltitri .
’
Gov ernment of P repositions, &c .
65 . Th e l ist of prepositions, page 7 2 , beginning
w ith f l age, &c . , go v ern th e gen itiv e w ith é ke ; as,
5 T J.{ ghar ke age ,
‘
b efore (in front of th e ho u se ;)UofUjo darya ke par,
‘
o v er (on the o ther side of) th eriver,
’
&c . Th e less n um erou s list, b eginning w ith M U
odont, &c . , page 7 3 , govern th e gen itive w ithL; ki , as,
u,L 5 skahr kt taraf ,
‘ to w ards (in th e d irec tion of)th e c ity .
’
All th e prepositions may b e optionally pu tb efore or after th e w ord w hic h they govern , the ir effec ton th e substan tive , w ith fe w exc eptions
,remain ing
th e same .
a . Th e prepositions being all su bstantives in an ob liqu e casew hose term ination is (No . 64, c) idiomatically om itted
, it is easyto see fromw hat w e have j u st stated w hy they shou ld governth e gen itive in ke o r ki , b u t never in kit . There is how ever onepecu liarity attending some of. th e fem imne prepositions w hichcu stom seems to have established thou gh th e ra tiona le of it be
not at all evident. W e have excellent au thority for saying thatth e w ords o w ,
and tu te, w hen they precede
th e substantive , requ ire th e genitive in L355 kc ; and w hen they
follow,they requ ire ki . In th e second volum e of th e K h irad
Afroz , p . 27 7 , w e have 3 Jet. o w bamadad’
akl ke, by
aid of th e u nderstanding .
’ I n th e B ag_/t o B akar
,* p . 40
,w e
marsi bu sitr Ice, w ithou t consent of
W h enever reference is made to th e E dg it o B akitr,it is u nder
stood to b e th e edition recently edited by m e , at th e desire and expense
of th e Honou rable the East- India Company. It is not only th e c h eapest,b u t in every respect th e best w ork th at th e stu dent can peru se , after h e
h as gone th rough th e Selec tions appended to th is Grammar.
—D.E.
P repositions. 99
h er highness th e princess ,and in page 188 of th e sam e w ork,
w e have L i l ek taraf skakr ke,
on one side of
th e city ’
all of them w ith he l n every edition and copy, printedor manu script . Th e w onder is, h o w it escaped th e cri tica l
amendments of th e Calcu tta editors already alluded to ; b u t so ith as
,for even tkey have here follow ed th e estab lished reading.
0
b . Th e preposition Agi le mitnand or mt'
inind h as been amplydiscu ssed by Dr. Gilchrist in several of h is w orks, b u t it m u stbe confessed that th e learned doctor does not in this instanceappear as a sound and fair critic . He assumes that one of th em u nshi s u sed kc instead of ki by mistake, and that h e h adsu fficient influ ence w ith all th e other learned natives of th e
cou ntry to m ake them take h is part, and sanction th e error.
This argument is so very ridicu lou s that refu tation is su perflu ou s. Use is every thing in langu age , and if in H indu stanicu stom h as ordained that several of th e prepositions w hen theyprecede th e w ord w hich they govern , requ ire th e genitive w ithkc
,and w hen they follow requ ire ki
,then it is th e du ty of th e
grammarian fairly to state th e fact. I t is qu ite probab le thatm any instances of this m ode of constru ction
,in addition to
those w hich w e have shew n above, may yet be detected .
c . Th e adverbs dad‘ here, ’ and
Lfile/1.
‘ there ,’ govern th e
genitive w ith Ice, like nou ns or prepositions. When thu s u sed ,they convey id iomatically th e sign ification of a t
,to, or in th e
hou se of, ’ or in th e possession of.’
Sb ulfla
‘. L5 w ho go to
th e gentlem an’
s hou se , ’ w hich 1s not u n liketh e u se of th e
French particle ch ez . Th e prepositionswU and are
u sed in th e same general sense as utUéa l
‘near or w ith
h im ,
’
and m ore generally in h is possession , ’ ckez Zu i . Th e
w ord mi l d)
? denotes idiomatically ‘
in th e Opinion of,
’
as
L5 u jw in th e opin ion of th e w ise ; apu d sa
pieu tes.
’
d . Several of th e prepositions, w hen they follow their sub
100 Dativ e and Accusativ e .
stantiv es, may dispense entirely w ith th e genitive signs kc and
ki, thu s she w ing a tendency to becom e real postpositions as
,
u ..U near or before th e judge . I f th e w ord they governb e a nou n of th e third class
,or a pronoun , th e inflected form
remains th e sam e as if ke or ki h ad b een expressed ; as,
(a PUéjl near th e b oy Us u -l w ithou t h im o r h er and if
th e w ord governed be th e first or second personal pronou n , w henth e gen itive is thu s dispensed w ith , th e ob liqu e form smajh and taj/t
s e".
are u sed ; as, u Uegg"
‘
near m e U'Ai d.x“
near thee .
’
D ativ e Case .
66 . Th e u se and application of this c ase is verynearly th e same as in most Eu ropean langu ages. As
a general ru le , an English no u n , go v erned by th e pre
positions to orfor, w ill b e expressed in Hindu stan i bym eans of th e dative case .
a . Th e Hindu stani dative som etimes corresponds w ith th e
Latin accu sative , expressive of m otion to a place for instance,lfid? f fl
?
U 3":‘ I w ill go home , ibo dom um .
’
In this lastsense also, th e sign ko is often om itted , ‘
w hich brings it stillnearer th e Latin ; as, u )
“U‘
l>U
s ; ‘ I am going home,dom um .
as,f u t.) by day w l
)by night ,
5rue at evening .
’In
Th e dative case is also u sed to express tim e w hen ;
su ch expressions th e post- position ko is frequently and even ele
gantly om itted as, u
h) Cfijl one day and if th e w ordsive of tim e be accompanied by an adj ective or pronou n subj ectto inflection , th e inflected form of th e latter remains th e same ,
0
as if Ico h ad been expressed as, usu
~ l‘
on that day? “3 ‘ s; u
-s
at what timeAccu sativ e Case .
67 . Th e ac c u sative in H indu stan i , as in English ,
is generally like th e nom inative , b u t w hen it is desir
Ablativ e'
and Locativ e .
P c e
,
m ination e or enfor th e latter ; as, US ga l f J d
eli
th e j u dge gave u p to h er th e child .
’
Ablativ e and Locativ e .
68 . Th e ab lativ e deno tes th e so u rce from w hic hany thing proceeds ; th e lo cativ e , as its nam e im ports,deno tes situation. In the ir u se and application theygenerally c orrespond w ith th e Latin ab lative .
ablative sign Ja se signifies from ’
and w ith .
’ It IS"applied to th e instrument w ith w h ich ,b u t very seldom to th e agentbJ w h om, any act is done, u nless in connection w ith a neu terverb . Example : l
Jl-o
u‘ " j}: J M J all; th e execu tioner
sm ote th e prisoner w ith a sw ord .
’
In Dr. Gilchrist’s StoryTeller (No . w e have an instance of se denoting th e
agent, th e only one w e have ever m et w ith in o ur reading ;c. p f 5
J ? J? g ilegj fiers L
“sq/5” g
.» ds‘
‘
h ow is it that stale breadw as eaten by thee ? ’ With a neu ter verb se m ay be u sed todenote th e sou rce or origin of th e even t
i
described as follow s,
som e poet) a fau lt took place .
’
b . With th e verb Leg ko h at'
i , to say or tell , ’ th e particle
q“ se seem s to be u sed idiomatically, and m u st often b e trans
Plated ln En
glish by to ’
as, u )“hi; 6
“
U5“OJ
cf": I am
saying to h im ,
’
or telling h im,tru th ; becau se th e sentence
U)” Uw g f“75 U~ l
UM » w ill m ean , I declare h im (h er Or it) to
be tru e, ’ or I call that tru th ; 0 , 6.\Sm 5 o
jo (i f),jfie l
m eans, people do not call h im a man .
’
Th e u se ofJ
.» se w ithUZS therefore, 15 obviou s.
c . Th e locative sign we men generally denotes in, sometimes
to or into ; asu j
ev
é ‘
h e is in th e city ; ’ L?
Th e Agent w ith NE . 103
"
h e is gone to (into) th e city .
’
Th e locative signsW and
Jug; have frequ ently th e post-position
L5.» j oined to them ; as
,
h e brought a sw ord from in th e cityi
y) ,S‘
, i $1 a, h e fe ll dow n from on h is horse .
"
Case of the Agent.
69 . Th e case of th e agent , charac teriz ed by th e
partic le J ne, is never u sed except w ith transitivev erbs, and w hen u sed it is confined to those tenseson ly w h ich are formed of th e past partic iple (page 93 ,
No . Th e verb then agrees w ith th e o bj e c t ingender
“
and number, u n less it b e deemed requ isite torender th e obj ec t defin ite by th e add ition of th e par
tio le ,5 ko (No . in w hic h c ase th e verb remains
in th e simple form of th e third person singu lar mas
c u line .
a . In fu rther illu stration of this very simple ru le, w e here su bI
j oin a su fficien t numb er of examples ; US
13 9) J U. .l h e
saw a dog,’or
,literally
,by h im a dog (w as) seen ; likew ise ,
J t-i ")
u ? J wl h e saw three horses, ’
or, by h im ,
’
Sto
Cfi dJ U‘ l h e saw a fox ;’
w e9.
duliJ Z) ’w J u -l
h e saw m any foxes ’
,in all w hich phrases th e constru ction agrees
precisely w ith th e Latin passive voice . Again, if it b e deem ednecessary or elegan t to add ko to th e obj ect, then th e
’ verb w illb e alw ays th e sam e
,that IS, th e m ascu line singu lar form ; thu s,
U9 o jg u :SJ in w e have seen th e dog ;
’ U9o ,§ (3
have you seen th e horses ? U5» ) )5 J 954 w l w
w hen that m an saw th e fox ; ’ U9 d jf u fijw jl J re w e haveseen th e foxes.
’
Th e sam e ru le applies to all th e tenses intow hich U9 .) en ters (p . as
, L51:5U9 d US fi fel J w ), h e h as
seen a dog’
,so ,
E56) 49 0 g? 55 J »? J u l h e h ad seen three
‘
V104 Th e Agent w ith NE .
horses As this is a su bj ect of great importance in th e lan
guage, w e w ou ld advise th e student to repeat each of th e abovephrases in all th e tenses given in page 56.
b . It mu st be rem embered that th e case denoting th e agent in1
th e personal pronou ns I and th ou,are J W maifi ne and J J
?
til ne or J u}taih ne as, W 0
,fiilJ m ;
‘ I saw h im (h er or
m ) Jiv e mi J j
; ‘ hast thou not heard this proverb If
,how ever, th e pronou ns b e follow ed by a qu alifying
w ord (sub stantiv e or adj ective), th e inflected form s {5° m ujh
and fix‘tujh are u sed
,thu s
,in th e B irg it o B ahr
’
ir,page 20,
P
A
J
i
b, cf .
“ db
65 u bLo J f
/
si ‘65‘
‘ I poor (orw retched) ob tained nou rishm ent u nder th e shelter of my parents.
’
c .
’
Th e stu dent shou ld endeavou r to remem ber th e lim ited and
restricted u se of this case of th e agent . l st. It is never u sedbefore a neu ter or intransitive verb . 2nd . It is never u sed beforeany of th e tenses form ed from th e root or from th e present partic iple of any verb w hatever. 3rd . It is never u sed b efore th everbs kl
) ;bo lne
—z ,
‘ to speak or say,’
nor before W 16726,‘ to bring, ’
althou gh they both seem according to ou r notion to be intransitive . B alm
-
z appears to differ very little from laékahm'
i, w hich
last requ ires th e u se of th e agen t w ith ne . Th e verb liint'z is a
compou nd of le-Emc’z , th e last memb er of w hich is neu ter or intransitive
,and this leads u s to a general ru le
,w hich is, that
compou nd verbs, su ch as Intensives, of w hich th e last member
is neu ter,though really transitive in signification , do not requ ire
th e agent w ith ac ; thu s, U‘J” 3 lg j ci léf i lm s: J )
‘ thoseb
0.
travellers have eaten u p th e dinner.
’
d . When tw o sentences having th e sam e nom inative or agentare cou pled by th e conj u nction ”
l au r, and,’th e first of w hich
having a neu ter verb , and th e follow ing a verb transitiv e , it isnot necessary to express th e agent w ith ne in th e second sentence ,b u t th e constru ction goes on th e same as if ne h ad been ex
106 Numerals.
Numerals.
7 0 . W hen a nou n is ac com panied by a numeral
adj ec tive , th e plu ral term ination on of th e ob liqu ecases is generally dispensed w ith . If th e nou n b e of
th e third c lass, th e inflec ted form in e is generallyu sed .
a . Thu s, lj lm jg a}. ) l> J three soldiers beatfou rmen .
’ W e have reason to believe that th e addition of th eterm ination on w ou ld render th e su bstantives m ore pointed or
definite ; thu s tin‘
sip iih iyonne w ou ld signify th e three soldiersIn th e grammar prefixed to Dr. Gilchrist ’s Dic
tionary (London w e have le.? v ". cg g al) :
ljfi f‘
a
hundred horses w ere at th e Naw w ab’
s,
’
w hich ou ght to b e translated a hu ndred horse , ’ i. e . a troop or collective body of one
hu ndred , ’ w hereas, ‘
a hu ndred horses, ’ or‘
a hundred boys, ’
w ill b e and £ 1"
sau larke .
b . Collective numbers add on to denote m u ltiplication or re
petition ; as, w bjljl w fi i y
‘ hu ndreds of battles ; ’ ”t.uflljb
7thou sa nds of cities. Any numeral by adding onbecomes m ore9
emphatic or definite as, 0 -
43 " J , those fou r persons.
’
Words expressive of time , as year, m on th , day, &c .,add on
0 ?
in th e nominative plural ; as, Jjéf‘ years have passed
aw ay .
’
0 . In Hindu stani th e c onj u nction , &c . is idiomaticallyom itted in su ch phrases as
UJJo
‘
tw o (or) three ,’ v . 34
(from) ten (to) tw enty .
’ A doub tfu l number is expressed byadding g
’
figl to th e numeral ; as, Ci d deal abou t ten
m en abou t a hundred years. To signify fold , ’
orLf is added to numerals ; as AL> jd tw o- fold ; ’ hf
V
ten fold .
’Distrib u tives are form ed by doub ling th e number
Comparison of Adjectiv es. 107
2
as, ,uJo tw o by tw o ,
’or tw o apiece . Thu s, su ppose w e
w ish to say, g1v e these men three ru pees each ,’ or three rupeesI O p
apiece,” th e Hindu stani w ill h e ,s u ? ,5 U1
to these men , three three ru pees give .
’
Comparison of Adjectiv es.
7 1 . W e have already ob served that adjec tives inH indu stani do not adm it of comparison by any regu lar
and systematic term inations. Th e comparative degree is indicated b y m erely pu tting th e standard of
c omparison in th e ab lative , and th e su perlative byprefixing to that th e w ord sah , all .
’
a . Th e comparative and su perlative are to be inferred in generalfrom th e context, as th e adj ective h as on ly one form ,
that of th e0 7
positive or simple w ord , thu s J o f. lie: (9
5
°
use
us.
“
th e m iser is b etter than th e lib eral man ifh e (th e m iser) give an
answ er qu ickly .
’ It is obviou s that ifth e standard of com parisonshou ld inclu de th e w hole class spoken of, th e adjective w ill express
I P
th e su perlative degree . Ex .
us e
j.)H5
" ,
u“
u )
of all accomplishments tw o are best (v iz . learning and th e art
of w ar).
I) . To express th e comparative degree, th e particles l aur,
and sub) z iyada , m ore, ’ may also b e employed exactly as inw ?
French and Engh sh ; as, u.» g al
/P u h
]:
those people are w orse than dogs.
’
Th e adj ective is sometimes
dou b led to express th e su perlative degree ; as,leg-l leg
‘ verygood b u t th e w ords most commonly u sed and prefixed for thispurpose are l}; great, very ; W m u ch b eyondbounds M L
?) extremely w k“ very (generally in a b ad
or disagreeab le sense) and L; m ost; very , ’ w hich last is added.
It is to b e furtherob served that l".
though thu s u sed apparently
108 P ersonal P ronouns.
as an adverb , agrees in gender and number w ith th e substantive ;
6; l u l 5 . l?) 5
)h e i s a very w icked b oy ’
,and again,
anLl u J :1 a; sh e 15 a Very w icked girl . ’
0 . Th e particle L: sa (se, Si), w hen added to a su b stantive,converts su ch substantive into an adj ective denoting sim ilitu de ;as, ”
31> d b l} L00
8 ‘
a dog- like u nclean animal . ’ When
added to an adjectiv e , it seems to renderth e sam e more intensive,thou gh frequ ently it is d ifficu lt
‘ to find for it an equ ivalent00 ‘English expression ; as ;T J ib bring a little w ater ,
u p Ulla} J l‘é-J” (
a b a d there w ere many w eapons there .
’
When th e comparison made by l.» allu des to one thing ou t ofm any, it go v ern
w
s th e gen itive case ; as in th e sentence
draw
l.» Kas?
”as? blew you also have a body exactly
like thei1s ’a »
?
L5» a form like that of a tiger.
’
Use of th e P ersonal P ronou ns.
7 2 . Th e personal prono u ns, as in Latin , are v eryoften m erely u nderstood , partic u larly b efore su c htenses of th e v erb as possess d istin c t personal term inations ; and as a general ru le , th e prono u ns ne ed no t
b e expressed w hen th e sense is qu ite c lear w itho u tthem , except it b e b y w ay of contrast or em phasis.
a . When th e third personal pronou ns b ecom e th e obj ect of anactive verb , they are generally u sed in th e second (or dativ e)
7 (o f
form of th e accu sative as, ” Lo ,fifo l beat h im
J
i
ll.) j9 l cal lthem ; Sls d “l take this aw ay .
’ I f, how ever, they are em
ployed as adj ectives, along w ith their su bstantives, they m ay
be u sed ln th e nom inative form as, jibJ: a ll
VJ you
hear this w ord .
’ With th e conj u nctive participle , they are ele
gantly u sed in th e nom inative form ; as, ll ; a
t;‘ having said
this.
’
Sometimes, though rarely , th e nom inative form m ay be
1 10 P ersonal P ronouns.
tempt ; b u t in th e vu lgar tongu e they go a step further, and th espeaker u ses th e plu ral
(Ab w e ,
’
w hen it really refers to no morethan himself. This ab u se h as led to th e necessity of adding th ew ord 6e f-l people , ’ to denote a genu ine plu ral, as ham log, w e
(people), tum log, you Thu s, (
to‘ I
know ’
(literally w e know ’and if a real plural is m eant
,
then they say lzam lo oPo
,Da jante Izazn , so
, ,of rm g laS give m e
(u s) th e book.
’ To testify great respect, th e third person m u stalso be u sed in th e plu ral w hen speaking of a king, sain t, or anyillu striou s or 1espected m an in general ; as
, «T5gal e):
{0
J )
h e 1s speaking t1 u th ’
(literal ly they, &c . When th e plu ralis thu s u sed for th e singu lar, it is generally uninflected ; b u t
w hen a still higher degree of respect, or a m ore decided plural is9
intended , it receives th e inflection ; as, RS J “yell they or b e
(h is honou r, m aj esty, &c .) said .
’
e . This confu sion of numbers may have given rise to th e follow ing idiom s : JJ leu JJM
‘in to ou r and you r hands
,
that 1s, into th e hands of u s tw o ;
(3rm 11am tum
c lza lenge, w e and you (i . e . I and tliou) w ill go , ’ m eaning ,‘
w e shall go .
’Th e speaker p o litely assumes precedence to
h im self ; and w hen tw o different persons thu s occu r in a sentence,th e verb agrees w ith th e fi1st person in preference to th e second ,and w ith th e second i n preference to th e third ,
as, (
3vs
w e and you w il l go 535 J j (3 you and they w ill go .
’
f. W e here su bj oin th e ru les laid dow n by Muhammad Ibrah 1m of B omb ay respecting th e etiqu ette of th e pronou ns.
1. When th e speaker and th e person w hom h e addresses are
of th e same rank, each shou ld speak of h imself in th e singu larnumber, and address th e other in th e second person plural .Q. A person of su perior rank m ay speak of himself in th e plu ralnumber, b u t th is is not considered to b e polite, nor is it thoughtcorrect to address even th e low est rank in th e singu lar number.
Personal P ronou ns. 1 1 1
3 . Th e pronou ns of th e third person m ay be u sed in th e singu larw hen speaking ofany person in their presence , u n less they be ofsu perior rank, w hen they ou ght to be spoken of in th e plu ral .4. When one person of rank addresses another of th e sam e or
su perior rank, or Speaks o f h im in h is presence,it is m ost
correct to make u se of th e respectfu l pronou n or th e great0 P
man’
s title , or some respec tfu l phrase, as &J‘A5 you r honour,
u p}; honou r, highness, &c . , and th e like , w ith th e third
person plu ral (of th e pronou ns and verbs) and w hen an inferioraddresses a su perior, h e ought at all times to u se similar expressions of respect, su itab le to th e rank of th e person addressed .
”
W e may fu rther add , that an inferiorat th e sam e time speaks ofhimself ln th e third person sing ular, u nder th e appellation of
(All : your servant ’
or slave ; ’ J ) ; you r devoted ; ’ you rbondsman ; ’
uals" ° you r sincere friend , &c .
g . In a narrative of w hat h as b een said,th e same w ords are
given w hich are su pposed to have been u sed by th e personW hose speech is reported . Ex . h e said h e shou ld go next day, ’
Kl; l> JS cf ?" asMJ u ..l lit. h e said
,I w ill go to-m orrow .
’
So ln th e sentence , h e told me to go home,’
Jl>
1 6? <6HSJ w l
litt . h e said, go home . This idiom atic u se of th e pronou ns
,and
consequ ently of th e persons and tenses of th e verb, is w ell
w orthy of th e stu dent’s attention . I t is perhaps that point inw hich th e Hindustani differs m ost w idely from th e English , asw ill be seen in th e follow ing sentence , w hich to save room w e
shall give in th e R oman character. K a l ma in no Zip ke bete ko
shahr men dekfic'
i, w u h yahanaye cl am ma tum se milne Ico ,
par kalu'
i Ici gkoramerii mar-
gaya, au r lzamenislzara kiya lei Zip
se sakir karnfi ki upn'
i pal/c? mere w aste bizej-dena'
; fi ,l,[22il jo
tumlzar'
z'
p a lki maujud na fio, to muMlisap ai pal/ti asire w aste
blzej- degt'
i .‘ I saw you r son yesterday in th e city
, h e w ishedto come here to see you , b u t mentioned that h is horse w as dead,and desired me to tell you to send you r palki for h im ; if you r
1 12 Th e P ossessiv e A P N A .
palki be not no w at hand , I shall despatch m ine for h im .
’ Fromth e preceding sentence it w ill appear that considerab le attentionand experience w ill be necessa
py b efore th e stu dent can readilyapply th e pronou ns agreeab ly to th e ru les of grammar, idiom ,
and etiqu ette, w hich last is a poin t of great importance amongth e Orientals.
Use of th e P ossessiv e apna .
7 3 . W hen there o c c u rs in th e c omplemen t of a sen
tence a possessive pronou n b e longing to th e nom inativeoragen t , su ch possessiv e is expressed in H indu stan i byhill apna - ne or - n i).
a . W e may define th e complement of a sentence in general ,as that portion of it w hich in English follow s th e v erb thu s
,in
th e sentences, ‘
h e returned to h is hou se , ’ ‘
h e w as doing h isb u siness,
’
th e phrases to h is hou se , ’ and h is b u siness,’ form
th e complem ent . Again , in each of these, th e possessive pro .
nou n leis,if it refers solely to th e nom inative li e
,w ill b e ex
pressed by ap nc’
i in H indu stani , as, b l j g) JXUz i at
)and
lei U}ri§Cal 8 . b u t if th e pronou n lzis refers to another person,then it w ill b e expressed by Kill u ska Ice
,- ki) ; for instance,
( A ?
b l1 556
q h e came to h is hou se, ’ m eaning not h is ow n
house,b u t th e hou se o fsome other third pe1son .
b . When th e nom inative of a sentence consists of th e first orsecond personal pronou n , and its possessive occu rs in th e com
plem ent, th e m atter adm its of no hesitation as,
‘ I am goingto see my father ; w e have seen ou r new hou se ; ’ ‘
you are
destroying you r health ,
’
in all of w hich ap nc'
i w ou ld b e u sed formy,
’ ‘ou r,
’
and you r, ’ respectively . In th e u se of th e thirdperson , how ever, th e English langu age 1s liab le to an amb igu ity,for example , th e sentence h e w as b eating h is slave h as tw o
m ean ings ; it m ight be h is o w n slave , or anotherman ’
s. Th e
H indu stan i is m u ch m ore explicit ; h is o w n slave ’w ou ld b e
expressed by ap na g li u lam ko,
’
and another man’
s slave by
1 14 I nterrogativ es.
that , ’ together w ith the ir plu rals, are sometimes u sedin th e sam e sense as o u r definite artic le th e .
’
Theyare applicab le to b oth genders, and agree w ith the irsu b stantives in c ase , and generally in numb er.
a . W e have seen it stated in some grammar,‘ that a de
m onstrativ e pronou n in th e singu lar may be u sed w ith an Arab icplu ral
,
’
&c . ,from w hich th e reader is left to infer that it is not
u sed w ith any other plu ral . No w th e fact is, that gilt and w u lz
are frequ ently u sed w ith any plu ral, and represen t th e plu raleven w ithou t th e substantive ; as,
555Vii} “5
5
k; fig.
these tw o brothers w ent to th e magistrate ; and again ,
U.»
cf?" fi
gL; a l
l.» a; at)
‘ they by w ay of alms giveIt w ou ld b e needless to m u ltiply examples, as they
may be met w ith in any au thor. W e have reason to believe , ho wever, that w hen th e singu lar is thu s u sed, it is e ither to denote a
collective grou p , orin a disrespectfu l sense ; on th e sam e principlethat th e plu ral is applied to one person to denote respect orreverence .
‘
I nterrogativ es.
7 5 . Th e interrogative wf iraan , w hen u sed by it
self, generally applies to persons,and LS Irpe
'
x to irra
tional or lifeless b e ings ; b u t if th e su b stan tive b eexpressed , [man w ill agree w ith it adjec tive ly in case
and numb er, w hereas th e inflec tion of law ? is ne v'eru sed adj ec tive ly .
a . For example, in th e phrasegmu ;
‘
w h o is there ? ’
th e
inference is, w hat person ? ’
80, L5
13 l signifies w hat (thing)
Here is anoth er instance of a fem inine preposition requ iring th e
genitive in Ice , agreeably to w h at w e stated page 98, a . Th e exampleis from th e B t
'
ig lt
l
o B alzar, p . 144 . It is th e reading of h alf-a-doz en
different copies (tw o of th em manu script), as w ell as of th e Calcu ttaedition , 1836, printed in th e R oman ch aracter.
—D. F.
R elativ e and Correlativ e.
is'
it ?’ At th e same time w e may not only say «Sac
w ;‘
w hat
man ?’
,5 55A: 0 -5
‘ to w hat man ?’
bu t also )? L9); ‘
w hat
thing ? ’
US of w hat thing ? W e can also sayu’
mtLS
‘
w hat thing bu t w e cannot say gals to denote of
w hat thing .
’ Th e ob lique form Mike is u sed only as a sub
stantiv e ; as, J}? Li 6
.8K a w atch of w hat (sub stance ,&c . th e answ er to w hich may be L; Jr: ofgold, ’ &c . Sometimes, kya is applied to a person or thing by w ay of exclamation as, my} LS w hat a rogu e c u b l.S
‘
w hat an affair
When kpei is repeated , it seems to convey th e idea of‘
w hats c
v ar1ou s ?’as
, “ Ls -f; L5 L5 w hat van ou s w onders ? ’
Someg
tlmes,kya IS u sed as a conju nch on , meanmg w hether
,or;
’
hke
th e Latin si v e as, u
w LS t
i l; lS w hether in th e garden
or in th e field .
’
6. Th e interrogative is u sed for th e relative in su ch sentences9 0
gmw ; 6 u p Li l» W
I know w h o it is.
’
Also adverbsderived from th e interrogative (vide page 69) are in a sim ilarmanner su bstitu ted for those from th e relative ; for instance ,
Ilffl? 545 u )
; l:.i l> w W‘ I do not know w hen h e
w ill go .
’
0 . Sometim es a qu estion is u sed to denote negation or su r
prise ; as,lg) ; PK US J ) » Llj? Cfi
b
l; U3 all th e territoryw hich thou hast taken w ill be of no u se to thee and again,
0 9
W ad. UL; li e lS l>lJ wlé
‘
w here is th e king’
s son,and
w here this report ? ’
m eaning th e king’
s son h as nothing to dow ith this report .
R elativ e and Correlativ e .
7 6 . Stric tly speaking, th e H indu stan i does no t pos
sess a relative prono u n corresponding w ith ou r w h o ,’
1 16 R elativ e and Correlativ e .
‘
w h ich , and‘ that, ’
and as this w an t is a sou rce of
m u ch perplex ity to th e learner, w e shall endeavo u rmth e follo w ing paragraphs to explain fu lly h ow th e
place of th e relative 1s su ppl ied .
a . In page 29 w e _ h av e given th e declension of f andj.»
w hich from w ant of a better term w e called relativ e and corre
la tiv e,respectively . Th e w ord s1gnifies h e sh e w h o ,
’
ori that w hich
,
’and refers, not to an antecedent, like ourrelat1v e
w h o,
’
b u t ’ to a nou n follow ing, like ou r w ords w hosoever,’w hatsoever, ’ w hoso . ’ H ence 3; u su ally begins th e sentence
,
and is follow ed in a second clau se by j .» and th e u se of th e tw otogether generally forms '
a su bstitu te for our relative pronou nsw h o,
’
w hich ,’ and‘ that, ’ as w ill be seen by th e follow ing
exampleéi v ii M “w ?S3 le i) 3“ a ? is
“? 9 r’ éifi ff
the king m u ch approved of th e horses w hich you sent, literally,w hat horses you sent , th e king m u ch approved of th e same ;
’
vhf"
w c. ;
an L; J (
J“th at 13 all tru e w hich you
have said ’ literally,
w hatever yo u have said , that is all tru e .
’
In like m anner,th e relative and correlative adverbs u su ally ac
0
company each other ; , ls col-l" Jfi w
it? Jloulr"
{ifu k».
Where th e treasure 15 there IS th e snake and w here there is aflow er there is a thorn .
6. Som etimes, th e remote demonstrative m ay be u sed ‘
insteadof th e correlative, both pronom inally and adverbially as follow s,
t”ULA
‘
tw $1 ? h e w h o h asth e pot h as th e sw ord
(h e w h o pays best,is best served) ,
4
31) La , U’JO as
you shall give , so shall you get.’ In the follow ing sentence,th e
demonstrative adverbwlm) is u sed w hereas m a few sentences
before , th e au thor u ses th e correlative v l‘c’ for th e sam e expression (vide Selections in Devanagari , page 8, lines 3 and
lJ l>“59A: l}? a i d . ln~) «f
ights UL?“
lf§l>~ w here there shall be ninety-nine pitchers of m ilk, h o w w ill
1 18 Concord of Verbs.
in th e nom inative , b u t in th e ob liqu e cases ; kisi or
kisu seems to b e equ ally applicab le to persons or
things.
a . Th e indefinites ko,i and ku chfi, as w ell as th e numeral & l
ek, one ,’ frequ ently su pply th e place of ou r articles
or a certain ;’
as, lJ; o2"W flé
e A & l
a
‘
a sage
arriv ed in a certain city ; ’
j w jd & l a , ,-
i) on a
certain time a tiger fell sick.
’Th e indefinite article frequ ently
occurs m ore than once at th e beginning of a story,and it is a
point ofgood taste to u se koi and ek alternately, as in th e precedingexamples, so as to avoid th e clumsy repetition of th e same w ord .
Th e emphatic particle J ,i or
an M m ay be affixed to m any
of th e pronou ns ; as, a n u ! my (you r, &c .) o w n se lf ; LS'
Y’
“ I,
Also 1n th e ob liqu e casesv
a l,
3this same ;Egg,that same .
e e l &c ., as in f ,
gv
a l to this or that self- same person“ I /
or thing.
’
Som etimesuJ b is added w ith th e same effect .
Concord of the Verb w ith th e Nominativ e .
7 8 . As a general ru le , th e H indu stan i verb agrees
w ith its nom inative in numb er, person, and gender,
su bj ec t , how ever, to th e follo w ing exceptions : 1 . To
mark respec t , a singu lar nom inative h as a verb in th ep lu ral ; 2 . I f th e nom inative c onsist of different irrational objec ts in th e singu lar nu mb er, they m ay takea singu lar verb ; 3 . If th e nom inatives be of variou s
genders, th e v erb takes th e masc u line form , or agrees
w ith that,next to it Lastly . If th e verb b e transitive ,
and in any tense formed of th e past partic iple ,th e
nom inative assum es th e case of th e agent , and th e
verb fo llo w s a Spec ial ru le already illu strated , p . 103 ,
No . 69 , &c .
a . W e shall h ere add a few examples in illu stration of th epreceding ru le , embrac ing as it does th e w hole subject of verbal
Gov ernment of Verbs. 1 19
concord,w hich differs in some respects from that of th e European
langu ages. Thu s, “i s Lib a,
li e is w riting ; ’
u. m 5
)
sbe l S dancing ’
, w; J, they (males) are talking ’
,and
U3”G K J ) they (females) are singing.
’
The follow ingexamples refer to th e exceptions : 1 . J ) ; Jamil sw ab
th e king having seen (this), became tearfu l, ’ or w ept w hereI
th e verb J ,» is plural, expressive of respec t to ‘
th e king,’
w hich is in th e singu lar nom inative. In like manner w e have
u:15 Jk lz slag, w lfi «S w w h o
‘
it is not proper thatyou r maj esty shou ld su bm it .’ “
2 . In th e follow ing sentences w ehave tw o nou ns in th e singu lar number, cou pled by a conju nc
tion,w hilst th e verb 18 in th e sin
gu lar
,agreeing w ith th e nearest
nou n ; as, LA SM lS Lfi ljfiffl l J ; p
i‘
th e b u llock and horse0.
have j u st now arrived ; u‘m
L552) ; L‘
Ljd lS Mf ulgfi
l
th e end of dece1t 1s contempt and infamy .
’
3 . Several nou ns ofdifferent genders occu r in the next tw o sentences, b u t th e verbtakes th e mascu line plu ral in preference to th e fem inine ,
as,
J)w éé “gala :$1
urd
LsJilg-l u l.’ Loéod l
(
h er father,
mother, and brother w ere all three m editating th e accomplishment of h er marriage ;
’
U3»Ls
i ls J oliJ)? czjij l v ei ls g ia l
h is elephant,cam el , and carriage are b eing loaded.
’
Gov ernment of Verbs.
7 9 . In this departm ent th e H indu stani differs verylittle from th e English . Ac tives or transitives na
tu rally govern th e accu sative case , w hich , as w e hav eshew n , is generally like th e nom inativ e , and some
times like th e dative (vide p . 100 , No .
a . Cau sal verbs, verbs of clothing , giving, &c ., may b e cou si
dered as governing tw o accu sative cases, or th e accu sative and
120 Gov ernment of Verbs.
th e dative ; as, ) l> meg; é) having g1v en th e childfood, go home filaéJ”; d
“ pu t on h im these clothes ;and y ) Gi rl ,Lsi give h im a rupeeb . Some neu ter verbs, as l}! to come , ’ l» :
‘ to become, ’ lilyto su it
,
’ ll; to fall, ’ he s -sf to arrive, ’ L4 .» to become,’ lzbl>
L
to be desirab le ,’ Lb) to remain ,’ to appear, ’ Lil to
u nite , ’ lLLo to meet, to occu r,’ and lijb to be, ’ govern the
dative case, and are frequ ently u sed impersonally ; as follow s,0 f 9
db lJT
(a; g ag
" I feel compassionh"
5b “(
AW a i l; J ju g
“
I have some doub t in thisu ’fil
.
’wlb}
it is desirab le that w e shou ld go there .
’ W e m ay here observethat th e form
GEM? from cbdbnc’
z is frequ ently u sed impersonally in th e senseof it is proper, it is fit like th e Latin decet,op ortet. When thu s employed, it governs th e dative of th e
person , and either th e past participle or th e aorist of th e aecompanying verb , as in th e preceding example, w hich might also b eexpressed
Lsi b lz l1 l>
rb w e mu st go .
’ Som etimes, it m ay
b e u sed personally as,gib l> LS
,S(a w h l ch may mean w hat
is proper for you , ’ or w hat do you requ ire ,’
&c . W e cou ld i n
this w ay say vi tal? li la L9l fa
:
‘
you mu st go there, ’ or to
go there beh oveth thee .
’
c . Verbs m eaning‘ to sell
,
’
or implying gain havey
43lb
‘ hand, ’ connected w ith them ; as, “$ l i.e.i lb v i
v a; tow hom have you sold it ? ’ b l .@3lb M u ?
)rolg 3 . that
b u siness w as accomplished w ith great diffi cu lty ’
in like manner,
lJTai lb Al so
;£1323, Gi gi K3
?
h e gained a flow er as h is priz e .
’
d . Verbs w hich in English requ ire w ith , ’ ‘ from ,
’
or‘
by
after them , govern th e ab lative, and those w h ich requ ire
122 Tenses of th e R oot.
u se
rf u iil éds
u—R’B
15 3e c f‘fcrfi
xfll al—N b fi" I
P J ) ‘ U Lil.)hf
“; if a king sends an ambassador to anyplace, it is desirab le that h e shou ld be th e w isest and th e m ost eloqu ent man of h is tribe .
’ When th e pow er of doing a thing is
designed to b e expressed, th e verb hi s to be ab le,
’is u sed in
all its pa1ts, w ith th e root (or som etimes th e inflected infinitive)of th e principal verb , as, L5
; Li .» w l> a; or less frequ ently,15; Li.» w c
ab 53 h e cannot go .
6. Th e aorist is very frequ ently em ployed to denote presenttime w hen general and u nrestricted
,hence it is u sed m u ch in
proverb ial expressions, w ith w hich th e langu age abou nds ; as,Jim 1; “i
ii‘
th e W ealth o f th e w icked goes fornou ght . ’ It alsc:
expresses tim e fu ture or past,conditionally as
,
P f t
q J -e14 J r
)at
jfl if th e nightingale find
thy abode,then w ill th e rose -
garden b e forgotten ’
,r, if th e
nigh tingale fou nd thy ab ode , then w ou ld th e rose -
garden be forgotten .
’
On th e subj ect of this tense , Mu hammad Ibrahim h asgiven several sou nd remarks in h is grammar, already alluded top . 61
, &c . He giv es it th e nam e of fu tu re of th e su bj u nctive o rpotential m ood .
’ W e have discarded th e term mood altogether,as u tterly inapplicab le to th e Hindu stan i langu age , and infinitelym ore perplexing than u sefu l . Lastly, th e aorist is sometimes
9
accompan ied by th e present au xiliary tense up , &c . , page 44,th e precise effect of w hich it is difficu lt to determ ine ; as,
my“w i tsu s;
‘ I may Speak ;’
JDbeé bro ? Jasoda is or
may b e saying.
’
0 . Th e F u ture presents fe w pecu liarities, save that in respectfu l language it is often employed forth e imperative . and occasionally forth e aorist ; as, era“) usingLfii l u Lc w h o
have th e kindness, Sir, to g1v e m e a book ; ’
so l1keW 1se,
Tenses of tbc P resent P articip le .
Kin g “ Mr"
u rb fi é) w e)
“
am thinking that w hatever they say m ay be from envy .
’
Ou r
Second F u tu re or F u ture P erfec t is formed by the futu re ofb ) b y ?
b ig‘ to finish
,
’ to th e root of th e verb ; as, K1}? lgS9f
I shall have eaten , ’ Kai ? leg 3) h e w ill have eaten,
’
&c .
d . Th e I mp erativ e is confined in its application , strictly speaking, to th e second person , singu lar and plural . Th e h onorific
form addresses itse lf as to a third person by w ay of respect ; as,
jib) u b be silent ; , l jmd l
‘ come hither ; ’
M? ,Qs‘ pardon me,
’or may h e pardon m e . I t 18 not considered
polite to u se th e second person singu larof th e imperative to any
one,how ever low h is condition . Th e adverb a .“ is applicab le
to th e imperative m ood alone, is applied to it in common w ithP
th e other modes, cJ-‘
X’ is never u sed w ith it , as
, ji g .» w or0 1 q
I
M ”he: don’t forget ; Li l don ’t do so .
’
Th e imperative m ood 18 sometim es u sed idiomatically
, as in th e follow ingexpressions : ,b 33 ,m
‘ perhaps it is,
’
or it mu st be gl ,3'
3!
come, if you m ean to com e .
’
Tenses of th e P resent P articip le .
8 1 . Of these , th e Indefinite c laims most attention .
Th e nam e and sign ificat ion given to it in most gramm ars
,is
‘
Present Indefin ite Tense .
’
Th e epithe t ofpresent is m isapplied , as th e tense generally refers toth e past .
a . Among th e tenses of th e present participle, th e I ndefin ite
holds th e sam e rank that th e aorist does in those derived fromth e root . Its m ost ordmary significations are, first
,to denote
conditiona l p ast time, in w hich case it is generally preceded byf l or F if
,
’
a
nd follow ed byy then ; as in th e sentences
,
Ufa dc wh it»+5
2)3 ii i if h e h ad come
,then there w ou ld
have been no loss ; la; &3 cu b J ) “ a his cf; if I h ad
124 Tenses of the P resent P articip le .
spoken, h e w ou ld not have regarded w hat I said, ’ or if I shou ldspeak, h e w ou ld notregard .
’
So 111 th e B ag]; 0 B akar,p . 7 1
reo réfi fik r nil ga
'
i—s’ od q z w f l dg gy h
f?
re
fit c f
" d L‘ E‘ w it Jé'
f fj’i i yi -‘Dj l d ie «15-119
d l>~ If ou r days w ere at all lu cky , then w e shou ld have som e
w here found Hatim , and having seiz ed h im ,w e shou ld have
carried h im to Nau fal, then h e w ou ld have given fi v e hundredash rafis,
’
&c . Th e conj u nction is frequ ently omitted in th e
former or latter part o f th e sentence, and sometimes in b oth ; as,I
I gone , I shou ld have beaten h im sou nd ly ; ’
in like m anner,
Ub'
U);w
as h ad I been present, th e horse shou ldnot have been allow ed to escape .
’
b . In th e second place , th e indefinite is employed to denotecontinuative past time , or to express an act or event that w as
habitual ; as th e reader m ay ob serve in th e follow ing passage
braNb“ 10
1g" ffi’; U When th e gamester u sed to w in
(ji tta) h e u sed to b ecome (h ojattZi) so care less, that any one
m ight take off(u tc'
1r letd) h is clothes ; then even it w ou ld not be
(na botci ) know n to h im .
’
In like manner, B irg it o B a lz iir, p . 9
& d ‘e-r l bf w tsw fl ’ f m
1,5?“n
Q’s, ct}é; All n ight th e doors of th e hou se u sed not
to b e fastened , and th e shops of th e market u sed to remain Open ;th e trave llers u sed to go along,
’
&c .
c . Th e indefinite IS occasionally u sed for th e present by om itting
126 Tenses of th e Past P articiple .
f. Th e I mperfect denotes a past action in progress, and cor
responds w ith o u r o w n compound tense formed in a sim ilarco
o
manner ; as,lg; keg JJ h e w as w r1t1ng.
’In most of o u r
I
English grammars, th e indefinite past tense is very improperlycalled th e imperfect, as ‘
h e w rote, ’ h e spoke .
’ I t is need lessto state that these expressions in Hindustani mu st b e rendered ‘
c ! o r
by ‘éfl vi a l and Lé that is, th e sim ple past, of w hich w e
shall say m ore immediately .
g . Th e tense called th e P resen t D u bious (page 52) is 1gene
rally employed to denote a fu tu re action of uncertain occu rrence ;lfJJ
i
Jm or
u J
i
s DJ
“be
up ; (perhaps) I m ay beat, ’ or
‘
be
beating ; so 111 B ag iz o B ah ar, p . 38 : KJmh
‘SLS u “L3}
. zJ
What w ill h e (or may h e) be saying in h is o w n m ind ? ’
Tenses of the P ast P articip le .
82 . Th e m ain pec u liarity in th e u se of these is,
that w hen th e v erb is transitive , th e nom inativ e m u stb e pu t in th e case of th e agen t , as explained p . 103 , &c .
a . Th e P ast Tense corresponds w ith w hat is im properly cal ledth e imperfect in most English grammars as, K it? I
J h e w entI
aw ay ; ’ leg d 1“ you w rote ; ’
w hich expressions, though indefinite as to time , convey th e idea of a com plete or perfect actionhence th e absu rd ity ofcalling it th e imperfect tense . In additionto its common acceptation ,
it is sometimes u sed w ith a present,
and sometimes w ith a fu tu re meaning ; as in th e follow ing
Liz/
{33W u
L?‘
5;w J:
vii i
xJ
if sh e is found , thenmy life remains ; if not, it is gone I“
J.» i j?
" w hat h e sow s,that h e reaps.
’ W e have already stated that th e present is som etim es u sed for th e fu tu re to denote speed ; th e past is employedfor th e same pu rpose . Thu s a m an says to h is servant, Jll
,‘
bring w ater, ’ an d th e answ er w ill probab ly be J i Jl1L5~ b l!
Tenses of th e P ast Particip le . 12 7
‘ I have brou ght it, Sir, ’
m eaning, I w ill bring it imm ed iately .
’
I
It is sometimes applied in an idiomatical m‘
anner as,ljnJ
.» ijs
if it be so , w h y be it so
b . Th e verb to be h as,in Hindu stani, tw o tenses expressive of
th e past, v iz . lg w as,
’
and l,» w as (or‘
became w hichmay often be translated by th e same w ord into English . In manycases these appear to be synonym ou s in their application ; th estu dent, how ever, mu st pay particu lar attention to th e follow ingru le . Q) is u sed in reference to simple existence at a distan t
P
time or particu lar place , w hile ljm is applied to time or circumstances less remote , i n th e sense of becam e ; ’
as follow slg; sho al)
i figlc)“ Cfl ; v i there w as a king in th at cou ntry ; ’
if UV; 8; h e w as (b ecam e) confou nded .
’
In short,les de
notes permanen t existence,and i; that w hich w as
,or became
existing , through circum stances generally stated in , oreasily inferred from th e context .
0 . Th e P erfect answ ers to th e perfect tense in English, beingu sed to denote an action ne w ly past and finished ; as follow s,
(a , I
Lw
s-b W g ilt" v o my brother h as arrived g
mM65 JG, 55) u “
I have eaten fru it . ’ Som etimes it is u sed w ith adverbs of tim e,
in a m anner that cannot literally b e rendered in English ; as,
I
u )“w } UKu
m I have gone there yesterday , ’ for I w entthere yesterday .
’
In this case , th e u sage of th e French je su is
allé,’ w ou ld have com e nearer th e Hindu stan i .d . Th e P luperfect in English w ill generally b e expressed by
th e plu perfect in Hindu stan i, representing a thing not only as
past, b u t as prior to som e other even t as in th e sen tence ,o n ?
law 16g is we f w w
as la, ; gm ‘
1 h ad w ritten th e
letter previou s to h is arrival . ’
B u t th e converse of this ru ledoes not hold , th e plu perfect b eing frequ ently u sed in Hindustani w here in English w e employ th e simple past thu s in Story
128 I nfi nitiv e .
17, a learned Kayath orders h is slave to get u p during the
nigh t, and see if it rains. Th e slave, feeling him self very com
fortab le w here h e w as, conclu des, w ithou t getting u p , that it doesrain ; and gives th e follow ing ingeniou s process of reasoning
6C? lgi
'
llji’di l l “éu m
‘
J ? a}? 6 " th e cat cam e“ I “ I I
in,I pu t my hand u pon h er, sh e w as w et
’
\ ergo, it rains) b u t th eliteral m eaning is, th e cat h ad come . in
,I h ad pu t my hand
u pon h er, sh e h ad go t w et.
’
Th e general ru le is, that w hen one
definite past event precedes another past event in point of time,th e former is expressed in th e plu perfect . I t may happen that th elatter of th e tw o events is not expressed , bu t merely passing in
th e m ind ; as'
in th e above example,w here th e slave m ight have
added, as h e no dou b t m eant, thence , I ascertained that it w aspou ring, ’ w hich w ou ld have completed th e chain of re asoning.
e . Th e tense called th e P ast D u biou s (p . formed of th e
past participle and th e aorist or fu tu re of bras is u sed to express
remoteLg
probab ility past or fu tu re ; as in th e follow ing examples
Lf flé rjdf j; h ib d.)
up"
:I know no t
?
w h e l e h e m ay
(or w ill) have gone ; M.» w w r.»
wan on
th e w ay, you m u st have met w ith m u ch d ifficu lty . Th e P ast
Conditiona l (pp . 52 , 53) is of very rare occu rrence , and is undere
stood to exloress th e event in a more remote m anner than th e
Indefin ite (p . thu s,m? fit a) ,3 a w
ef tif I h ad opened th e cage, then it w ou ld have flo w n .
’
A kind ofexpression like th e P a u lo p ostfu tu rum , is expressed by Ltd?‘ to desire
,
’
w ith th e past participle of another verb ; as,
has; Lml> l
ie a; h e is ab ou t to die , is dying, ’ or w ill soon
die .
’ There are also other w ays of expressing the same ideaP I i I
I ryinitiv e .
83 . Th e infinitive is u sed as a su bstantive to deno teth e state or ac tion of th e v erb ; it is frequ ently u sed
130 I ry‘initiv e .
Latin participle in dus) by changing Uinto gs; or thus,
cf‘
j‘g’o
‘Jf wig) dé
‘éflp
dw,» I have not learned to
Speak your language , 6 ° Ji v e6 45) J
) it is hard to
pu t one’
s finger on a lancet . So , ln th e B ir
git o B ah ar, p . 32
t el-in “
is? d fi d b ‘bu
’b w l fi f fl N e e -lv
‘
tfifl'lJJJ
" “1,
53c d
. )v
ac)? 0
,Sir
,if it w as you r
intention thu s to act th e stranger, then w here w as th e necessity ofpreviou sly tendering you r friendship w ith su ch ardou r? Here th e
infinitive karn'
i agrees w ith né- fish nc‘
zfi and dosti in th e fem inine
gender ; so , p . 35, W uJ>du d
JS19W magi ?
‘ to givetroub le to one ’
s gu est is not proper.
’ Sometim es (thoughrarely) th e infinitive does not agree w ith th e fem inine nou nw hich it governs ; as m ay b e seen in th e follow ing sentence
g rit
45 11,sM" a s ;
to do m u ch for this w orld is in fact m u ch- ado ab ou t nothing .
’
I f th e infinitive, w ith th e fem inine noun w hich it governs, benot th e su bject or predicate “
of a sentence, this concord does nothold b etw een th e
S“
in
fini
ti
ve and th e w ord w hich it governs ; as,
ua; an old m an and h is w ife cam e to cu t w ood (sticks),
and b egan to gather sticks.
’ Here th e infinitiv es torna and
ch u nne’
i do not agree w ith lakriyc'
zn, becau se they are neithersubj ect nor predicate to a sentence . W e have b een ratherdiffu se in explaining this pecu liarity of th e infinitive , b ecau seth e ru le respecting it, as given in m ost gramm ars, is, to say
th e least of it, u nsou nd . I t ru ns thu s : Th e term ination 9 is
u sed w ith certain verbs or w ith post- positions ; £53,
(ni ), w -‘ i
or L3 (niyiiri), w hen a feminine nou n s1ngu lar or plu ralis th e obj ect of th e verb and ll» in all other cases W e havej u st shew n from th e best au thority
,that ne is u sed w hen there is
P articip les. 13 l
0 c 0 0 O 0
nelth er a certaln verb nor post-p0 51t1on ln th e case, and0that m IS not necessari ly u sed at all tlmes w hen a fem1n1ne
nou n is th e obj ect of th e verb .
”
0 . Th e inflected infinitive w ith Irii (Ice or k?) is also u sed ad
jectiv ely in a sense somew hat like th e Latin participle in turns
as, W fi g.
‘ this cannot be ; ’ K“j ? u fl”rgs
u. » u i
no w I do not m ean to go to Persia ’
(non sum i turu s) ;
iSvi ta M w
.» I am not th e man to b elieve .
’ Lastly , th einflected infinitive 15 u sed w ith h i) w hen it m eans to b egin ,
w ith h m to grant leave ,
’
and w ith Uh to get leav e ,
’
as,
lil 3)h e began to say d l? jg r
m allow u s to go
we» d b d l d } they are allow ed to come .
’
Th e verb Ui>to go , ’ m ay also govern th e inflected infinitive of another verb
(ko b eing u nderstood) , as, dffdhé h i ) they w ent to play .
’
Th e verb h i .» to b e ab le, ’ generally governs th e root of anotherverb , bu t it is often u sed w ith th e inflected infinitive , particularly w hen accompanied by a negative particle °
as, lfj i .» do u. »
I shall be ab le to m ove ; ’ ig.’ h i .» at}cf i> 8
)h e w as not
ab le to m ove ; ’ hi.»is
” ? I cannot say.
’ Lastly,th e verb bone
—z, denoting ob ligation, m ay govern th e inflected
C»?
infinitive ; as,h)» d b ,
iA'
J‘
yo u m u st go ; ’ \f;la $20 ,ijJ
you m u st w rite .
’
P articip les.
84 . Th e present and past partic iples, w hen u sed
partic ipially and not form ing a tense , generally add
i}; (p . and agree like adj ec tives w ith th e nou n
w hich they qu alify . I n many instanc es th ey are u sed
adverb ially m th e mascu line inflec tion , or, m ore stric tlyspeaking , they are verbal nou ns in an ob liqu e case .
a . Th e follow ing examples w ill illu strate w hat w e have j u st
l 32 P articip lelv .
stated regarding th e participles w hen accompanied by h zi,ti ,
,fcliff 9 ;$ 3? u
:°
( Ji gs; is there any
one in B raj w h o w ill stop th e departing G0pal ? ’So likew ise ,
whéirs Ls
5 d jh th e bones of a dead t1ger and
,
um bi tc i u .
“ wjn n
‘
JW Cfigl “é
“ i be saw aa l l
kettledrum su spended m a tree .
’
Sometimes th e past participleis u sed like a m ere adj ective ; as, le.? “
Ll: leg, iljéi Cfigl there w as
a flow ery and fru itfu l garden ’
(not flow ered and fru ctified
b u t th e w ords p iz zi lti and p lza lti here may b e real adj ectives(not participles), derived from p izi
’
t l,
a flow er, ’ and pka l,
fru it,’ by adding ti , w hich is agreeab le to analogy. In expressions like th e follow ing, they are u sed adverb ially ; as, 6
°
w hen 1t w as moru 1ng ; ’
rh‘» w hen 1t w as ev en1ng ;
’
(4
J )“ w hile I remain
,
’
d eiga at th e sight of
b
w hom ; ’
L565 “ h ) w ithou t u nderstanding ’
,cp s) L3 3
0 at th e
time of giving.
’Th e present participle 1s dou b led , to express th e
continu ation or frequ ency of th e act ; as, l)» Au g ym d ) » f~ l§ l h as
o ur w ork being and being, w as not,’ i .e . continu ing to b e done,
w as not completed .
’
I) . From th e present participle is formed th e compou nd verbcalled sta tistica l (p . by u sing th e mascu line inflection of th eparticiple together w ith some verb of motion ; as, 6 11»
L531 egg 8
}
iTh e present participle in this case is
employed precisely like th e ab lative of th e Latin geru nd . Dr.
Gilchrist suggested that ki [l ti latmenis u nderstood (and ofcou rseth e Doctor’
s pilferers copied th e sam e), b u t a m om ent’s cou si
0 0
sh e comes s1ng1ng.
deration w ill shew that this theory is more ingeniou s than sound .
For instance, umUT(w M b
will?a)h e comes (in th e
state of) one singing,’
is all very w ell , bu t on th e other hand ,
9“L5
”; M B05) 9 4 h
,3)
‘
sh e comes (in th e state o f)
134
there t od ay, and hav ing taken my book, return ; and again,
bibcf)“ usi as? w r
lsw l‘
th is
regret h as come u pon m e (through) making haste in thisb u siness.
’
Th e stu dent w ill recollect that this participle h asseveral forms
,th e first of them th e same as th e root ; th e
second, th e sam e as th e m ascu line inflection of th e past participle, or th e second and third persons singu lar of th e aoristb u t th e context generally su ffices to prevent any amb igu ity .
e . Th e m ascu line inflection of th e presen t participle w ith th eaddition of th e particle h i , form s w hat m ay b e called th eadverb ial participle . Its signification is very nearly th e sam e as
that of th e conj u nctive participle ab ove described th e adverb ialform conveying perhaps th e idea ofm ore Speed or precision as,
o f
Us
L51 3.» ca l)
fig, (imm ediately) on hearing this statem ent . ’
This participle m ay be applied in three w ays, all of them tendingto prove w hat w e stated ab ove , that it is m erely a verbal nou n .
Thu s w e m ay say, on cu b w here yih bti t is th e first
I
form of th e accu sative ; w e m ay also say, u s jg w t»
u'l
w here i s bti tko 1s th e second form ofth e accu sative lastly, w e may
say, if é u h v i on th e hearing of this statement . ’
Here, w e see sante in th e first tw o expressions acting th e partof a transitive verb , and in th e last that of a su b stantive .
85 . W e have little more no w to add on th e syn taxof th e H indu stan i langu age , w hich , w e b elieve , w e
have disc u ssed m ore fu lly , and w e w ou ld fain hope ,
m ore intelligib ly ,than h as yet b een done . Th e fo llo w
ing fe w remarks m ay b e still added , as b elonging to
no partic u lar departmen t of th e su bj ec t .a . Som etimes a verb plu ral is u sed w ithou t a nom inative case,
som e su ch w ord as‘ they ’
or‘ people ’
being u nderstood as
in th e follow ing examples :w
»; ms U; thu s they say’
and ~
u“ ugi »; 14
“) i GSA men kill thou sands w ith one
Conclu sion . 135
sw ord .
’In negative sentences, th e verb ‘ to be ’
is generallyu nderstood ; as, u fl t
’ d ill 6 5 uh?» 13 51 3
"
rile
‘ cru elty (is) notb ecom ing you r dign ity .
’
Th e particle sf Iti is frequ ently u sed
after verb s of speaking, asking, &c .
,in th e sense of thu s, as
follow s, ’ &c . as,LS &3 ‘é c!
“ 65 hf J (f l‘
h e said h e h ad not
done it lit. h e said thu s, I have not done it.
’ This is verylike th e u se of th e particle an as it frequently occu rs in th e
Greek of th e New Testam ent. In a sentence consisting of tw o
or m ore clau ses, it is not necessary to repeat th e au xiliary verbf I I
in each ; as, L; (J) M ré l g
b é we” Ans 1
35l Sl
ness is th e thraldom of th e b ody,and sorrow that of th e spirit . ’
6. W e may here state in conclu sion, that throu ghou t thislong section on Syntax
,it h as b een ou r prin cipal aim to illu strate
those pecu liarities in w hich th e Hindu stani langu age differsfrom ou r ow n . Su ch ru les and principles as completely accordw ith those of th e langu ages su pposed to b e fam iliar to th ereader, w e have e ither passed over unnoticed
,or handled very
briefly. It m ay fu rther be stated that there rem ains a difficu ltdepartment of th e langu age w hich mu st be overcom e by prac
tice, v iz . th e u se o f idiomatical expressions. These do not con
stitu te th e su bj ect of grammar, and a know ledge of them is to
be acqu ired by reading th e best au thors, and by free intercou rsew ith th e natives of th e cou ntry .
SECTION VI .
Th e Dev anagarz Alphabet.
86 . This is th e charac ter generally u sed by th e
H indus. I t is read and w ritten from left to right ,like ou r ow n . Th e alphab e t
,as u sed for th e H indu
stan i,consists of eleven vow els and thirty three c on
sonan ts, all arranged as follow s
Voioels.
s i v a“
a a ii i "
a it'
Ti E
Consonants.
Eli (a ‘T 1El g :”a 5 a Q
“
a? I
k kit g g it : n cit eli li j j]: n. t‘
z e s m a v1 z a a v vi
a d dfi n t m d (a n 1) p t
3 31 31 T 57 a 1 ! ET 3 3
I) bit m y i' l w v 871, Sb 3 li
a . To th e above letters m ay be added th e symbol calledanu sw ti ra
,which represents th e nasal n (page . and th e
v isarga w hich corresponds w ith th e final w eak 8 (p . 6) ofth e Persian character. W e w ou ld at th e sam e time draw th e
stu dent’s attention to tw o compou nd ch a1acters,of w hich th e
e lements are so d isgu ised as to have th e semb lance of singleletters ; v iz . a Its/1
,compounded of at V’sou nded like o ur
51: in fluxion, or ct in faction ; n,sou nded like ou r gn
in bagnio, or th e French gn in ligne, champ agne , &c . Th e
m ark l is u sed in poetry to indicate th e first member of a
sloka or cou plet ; and at th e end of th e slo/ta it is generally
13 7
doub led, II In prose th e same marks serve ‘ to denote stops .In m any books lately pu blished in India, in,
the Devanagaricharacter
,the English stops are very properly and su ccessfu lly
introduced .
b . In naming the consonants, the short vow el a (the fa tlza of
th e Persi-Arab ic alphabet, p . 8) i s inherent 1n each ; thus ka ,kha
, ga , &c . and m read ing, th i s vow el 13 to b e suppl ied after’
every letter (except the final letter of a w ord), provided it be notaccompanied by any other symbol ; thus, m kiind
’
k,
‘ gold , ’
W niigiir,‘
a city .
’ I f a w ord terminates w ith '
a compoundconsonant
,the short (2 may be frequently supplied at the end , as
3? pu tra ,‘
a son .
’ W henever a consonant in the middle ofa w ord is not to be uttered w ith the short 22, the consonant ismarked underneath w ith the symbol (Qcalled v iriima or rest(the same as the jaz m of the Pe1 si-Arab ic , p . asW T
Up" to Speak ; 0 1 the In may be comb ined into one com
pound character, as H ; b ut in w orks circulated among thenatives this nicety is not attended to . Hence the first of thevow els, El a, i s never w ritten except it begin a w ord or syllab le .c . W ith regard to the remaining vow els, they have each tw o
form s : that given ab ove, w h ich may be called their primary
form,is used only w hen they begin a w ord or syllab le b ut
w hen they follow a consonant,they assume a totally different
shape , w hich m ay b e called secondaryforms thus, T a
, r i,
a .
3c\
u,
a
n,
e,
0 ,
33'au , as may be seen i n
the follow ing exemplification of them w ith the letter fl ga rthus ,
m fir st? 11 g g i’
fi fi ’i‘
r
gt'
t gi g? gu gil ggi ge ga i go gau .
And the same rule appl ies to the rest of the consonants .
d . I t w ill be seen that the secondary form of T f:w ritten before its consonant “
IT“
, though sounded after it : and
138 Compound Letters.
the student w ill do w ell to b ear in mind th is apparent anomaly .
The T and!
) take their place after the consonant ; the““and
e.
are fixed to the letter beneath ; the \ and a above ; and thefit and? are merely the T surmounted by the
.\
amdk
. Thevow els and in comb ination w ith the letter T r
,are w ritten
W
E ru,and Q or i n} ; and the vow el
ajo ined to 3 h
,is
w ritten firi .
Of Compound Letters.
87 . Th e stric t ru le in Devanagari w riting is, thatw hen tw o or more consonants com e together, w ithou tth e intervention of a vow el , su ch c onsonants u n ite intoone compou nd grou p thu s, in th e w ord W matsg/a ,
a fish ,’
th e a q and a are b lended as it w ere into
one character. For th e formation of th e compou nd
letters no general ru le holds, except that th e last of
th e grou p remains entire , and th e rest are more or
less c ontrac ted by om itting th e perpendicu lar stroke ,and som etimes by changing their prim itive form .
a . The letter I b eing of frequent occurrence in compounds,
i s w ritten over the group in the form of a crescent w hen iti s to be sounded first
,as in the w ords 3 35tarka, reasoning, ’
and 1111 53 p ai rs/ma ,‘
a: side : and w hen the I follow s anotherletter
,it is represented by an ob l ique stroke (J underneath , as
y
in E? su tra rule and We Chandra the moon .
G\i
b . In b ooks recently printed at Calcutta,such as the P rem
Sagar, the B aitdl P aci fist" , the Adv entures of.
Hatim Tdfi,
&c .,all in the Dev anagari character, very few compound letters
occur ; and as a general rule they are very l ittle used in any
of the spoken languages of India, b eing chiefly confined tomanuscripts and printed w orks in the Sanskrit language . The
140 C orresponding Letters.
I I . Consonants.
‘
a e a a a a
‘5 L‘) E
‘6? z t .
"
W a‘Zl 2
’
H . a
L9L2) £ 3 a 4 M
w
El
J J j u:
J OY-65
I I I . Vow els follow i ng a Consonant .
m fir an; 33:
at.»
at 33 i ts $11or
a . In the preceding tab le it w ill b e ob served that the tenaspirated letters of the Devanagari alphabet are uniformly represented by the corresponding unaspirated letter, together w ith theround or bu tterfly form of the letter b , e h thus, at ghar, a
house,
’
£ 5; at dhar,‘ place ,’ Jae . The real It 3 of the
Devanagari is represented in the middle of a w ord by t ; as,
‘
W he said,
’ “5 : if, how ever, the letter preceding the b bea, J , or J , then the form b must b e used, and the precedingletter marked w ith the appropriate vow el ; as, W da hdn,
‘ the mouth ,’ w hats. The cerebral letters 2“
and E are repre
sented by Q3) and 3,or a and 5 Sometimes the 3 and 3
have the sound of a cereb ral r and rh respectively ; in'
w h ich
case they are generally marked w ith a dot b eneath , thus T5" and 3and w ith
)" or}in th e Persian character ; as, W bag
‘
c
'
i, great, ’
l}. The various nasals of ‘ the Devanagar'i are represented by
P ersian and Arabic Letters.
the Persianc»
w hich w i ll be found Sufficient for all usefu lpurposes .b . The letter a is sometimes represented by E the letter
31 generally by 0 2
,sometimes by U‘ and the letter El is more
frequently 4 than U3. The compound a is generally repte
sented by 4? or 4 ,seldom by U
K,its proper sound . The
compound "33 is represented by 655 as, W T figs/ii
Lfl : its real sound
,as already stated , is that of gn in the
French w ords champagne, ligne, &c .
89 . I t appears, then , that th e Devan'
agari alphab etmay b e represented w ith to lerab le exac tness in th e
Persian charac ter b u t th ev
con v erse does not ho ld , as
th e Persi-Arab ic alphab et h as fou rteen letters w hichhave no exact cou nterpart in th e Devanagari . Th e
plan adopted in this case is to represent th e letters in
qu estion w ith su ch Nagari letters as approx imate
them in sou nd , w h ich‘
in some printed b ooks are dis
tingu ish ed w ith a dot u nderneath thu s,6is
U5 u° J
Fl El 3.
5! a El El
"
L
0
tL3
31“
31 3 18 m.31
0 0
a . In a few printed books an attempt h as b een made toinvent distinct letters for the various forms of the Persian and
Arab ic z , w h ich,it w ill be ob served, are all represented by
“
q“
! b u t in reality the subject i s not w orth the labour. In thefirst place, the H indus, w h o alone use the Devanagar
'
i character,are Sparing in the use of
‘
Persian or Arab ic w ords, to one orother of w h ich the various forms of th e letter z belong ; and
,
secondly, such '
w ords as they have in the course of centuriesadopted have become naturaliz ed
,or
,if the critic w ill have it,
142 P ersian and Arabic Letters.
corrupted, so as to suit the elements of the Nagari ; thus,is w ritten and sounded fl fi
'
flfl br’
ijiri . In a new edition,in
the Devanagar'
i character, of th e Adv en tu res of Hatim Tal i ,w hich w e have just received from India
,almost all dots and
doub le letters are discarded,as a useless incumb rance .
b . The lettertis generally represented in Nagari by employ
ing the vow el w ith w hich it is connected, in the initial form , with
a dot under it ; as, Aft .) W ba’
d(la m
’
i lm EH’umr. Th is method is suffic ient for practical use ; b u t it i s byno means ' satisfactory, as m ay be seen in the monosyllableW w h ich in Persian and Arab ic is sounded ba ’d (the a
uttered from the bottom of the throat) b u t according to theV ’
Vrules of the Devanagari alphab et it makes ba ad, unless w e usethe v iriima (0 under the 3! as
0 . W hen in a w ord tw o vow els follow each other , the rule is,to w rite the second vow el in the initial form for though not atthe b eginn ing of a w ord, it is the beg inning of a syllab le thus,$3 " b z
'
i,d ; fil’i fi
'
h o ,o fi aba,ite. Thi s is precisely thesame in principle as the use of the mark bamz a (p . 17 ) in thePersi-Arab ic alphabet.d . The b est mode of learning the Devanagari character i s
to w ri te out seyeral times the w hole of the single letters inPlate I I . The various elements of each letter w i ll be found inP late I . fronting the title page ; the smal l dot accompanyingeach shew s w here the pen starts from in their formation .
W hen the studen t h as made h imself tolerab ly familiar w ith theletters, he m ay commence w ith the first story
, w hich is thesame as the third story of the Extracts in the Persian character.In like manner he w ill find that the Dev anagan stories, from2 to 7 inclusive, are old acquaintances . Stories 8, 9, and
10 also occur in the other Extracts, b u t some of the w ordsdiffer
, v iz . those of Persian or Arab ic origin are displaced inthe Devanfigari for w ords purely Indian and Sanskrit . Therest of the Extracts in th is character are taken from the scarce
144 Exp lanation of tbc P lates.
mentary form here marked u ,w ith one dot sub scribed
,so as to
be equivalent to be, may, by a mere change of its dots , becomeL?) u. ) (p , t, s). The 3td form,
no w a ‘
C j, becomes inthe same manner
E’ t, C (eh , Zeb , b). The 4th makes tw oletters
,a,5 . The 5th , J , J
‘
, j ,and}. The 6th is repte
sented as consisting of tw o forms ; one an indented , the other aprotracted l ine
,m ay in either shape form the si n and sbi n (s and
sb), as the only distinction betw een th em i s that the sin (3) w ants,and the sbin (sb) h as, three dots superscribed, w hether short orprotracted . The 7 th form
, u‘ and U5 The 8th
,is and b (t, z ).
The 9th, t
and CC
The next letters are i. .5, J , J f w ,
J and 3 . Then follow the initial,medial, and final forms of
the 8 ‘
t g or be linked together. Lastly , the li
9 (la, bamea ,
and ye), the latter under tw o varieties of form, the last of w hichi s now conventionally used by th e natives to denote the ya
'
e
majb z‘
rl (p.
Division 2nd exh ib its the second elementary form (v iz . thatof cg , w
,and l ikew i se that of
c)and “55, as they appear
initially, w hen comb ined w ith each of the others follow ing them .
Division 3rd shew s theE (i . e . E’ E’ C’ or t)’ prefixed in the
same manner to each of the others . Division 4th (Pl . IL), theu , U
3. Division 5th
,the U9 , U5 Div i sion 6th
,the la
,L3
Division 7 th (P l . thei ’ a. Division 8th , q and C5 Di
vus1on 9th, the Cf , éf , and by leaving off the top part w e shall
in most instances have the initial J. Division 10th (Pl .the
1° Di v ision l l th
,the b comb ined initially w ith the rest of
the elementary forms . The tail of the be i s given only in b i , bd,bk
, b l, and ma, b u t omitted in all the rest, according to thepractice of Oriental w riters . Hence the initial form of th i s letteris often too apt to b e mistaken for the mim . The 12th Divisioncontains the comb ination of the characters as arranged in alphabetical notation , noticed in p . 20, forming the fanciful w ords‘
Abjad, baw a z , bu tflti , kaliman, sa’fas, barasbat, sag/l ag, gagag b ,and the last line may be.
read th us, indicating the name of thechirographer : A l’abd u l mugnib, a lfalcir u baid u llabi [zusa ini
sb'
irin rabamg bafi ara gu nubabu .
M u h am'
madan Calendar. 145
c . Plates V . to XIV . inclusive, consist of a series of w ord s ina lphab etical order containing comb inations of three or moreletters . The student should endeavour to transcribe these intothe R oman character, and after some time restore them, as an
exerc ise,into their original state . Thus , the first l ine of PlateV .
forms the comb inations bbjt, bbsb t, p nj, NM,and blnd
,
and so on w ith regard to the rest . Coming now to completew ords, w e may premise , as a general remark, that w hen thesecontain any of the letters w
, cu , u , “fig , i n the middle
of a comb ination, it is usual to g ive the middle one a bold dashupw ards, -terminating in a sharp point vertically
,l ike the n in
rz b
'
tnbw (P l . V . line or l ike the y in syb(P l . VI I . l ined . Conc luding remarks— In manuscripts the short vow els
and other marks seldom make their appearance ; and even thediacritical dots are often e ither altogether omitted or irregularlyplaced . I t m ay be useful to ob serve , then , that w hen from theamb iguous position of a dot, it m ay apply to more letters thanone
,it should of course b e assigned rather to th e letter, w h ich i s
not complete w ithout a point, than to one w h ich may dispense w ithit . Thus the third comb ination Plate 1. No . 2, should b e readbb, and the eighth ns, though the dot be over the last letter asif intended to b e a U5 . B u t in many cases the sense alone candetermine tb ep oint. Thus the last w ord of No . 2 m ay be eitherbe or pe and the dot over the ninth w ord of No . 3 i s so equ iv ocally placed b etw een that and the w ord above it , that it m ay
b e read either w as,
or according as the dot i s conc eiv ed to belong to one or the other, above or below . The grandkey, ho w ever, to the reading of manuscripts , is to know tbc lan
gu age ; at the same time many usefu l hints m ay b e gleaned fromOu sely
’s P ersian M iscellanies, 4to . London, 17 95 Stew art’s
P ersian Letters, 4to . London , 1825 and E ssa i de Ca lligrap b ie
Orienta le, i n the Appendix to Herb in’s Dév elopp emen ts des
P rincip es de la Langu e Arabe, 4to . Paris , 1803 .
M u bammadan Calendar .
9 1 . Th e Mu salmans reckon b y lu nar tim e , th e ir aera
c alled th e Hijra , c omm enc ing from th e day 0 11 w h ic hU
146 M u bammadan Calendar .
Mu hammad departed , or rather retreated, from Mec ca
to Med ina ; w hic h , according to th e b est ac cou n ts,
took plac e on Friday, the l 6th of Ju ly (18th , ne w
style), A .D . 622 . The ir year c onsists of 12 lu nations,am ou nting to 354 days and 9 hou rs, v ery nearly ;and h ence the ir Ne w - year
’
s Day w ill h appen everyyear abou t e leven days earlier th an in th e precedingyear.
a . To find the Christian year corresponding to that ofthe Hijra,apply the follow ing rule . From the given numb er ofMu salman
years, deduct tbree p er cent. , and to the remainder add then umb er the sum is the period of the Christian aera at
w h ich the given current Musalman year ends . For example,
w e men tioned,p . 2 1
,that the death of the poet Ahli happened
A.H . 942 ; from thi s number dedu ct three per cent. orand the remainder is To this last add and thesum= w hich shew s that the Musalman year 942ended in the spring of 1536. This very simple rule is foundedon the fact that 100 lunar years are very nearly equal to 97sdlar years, there being only ab out eight days of difference . Amore accurate proportion w ould be 101 lunar to 98 solar years ,b u t th i s w ould lead to a less convenient rule for practical use .b . W hen great accuracy i s required, and w hen the year,month
, and day of the Muhammadan mm are given, the prec iseperiod of the Christian aera m ay b e found as follow s : R u le .
Express the Musalman date in years and decimals of a year ;multiply by 9 70225 ; to the product add and the sumw ill be the p recise period of the Christian aera . Th i s r ule isexact to a day, and if in the Musalman date the day of thew eek be given, as is generally the case, the v ery day i s easilydetermined .
0 . The Muhammadan or lunar months are made to consist of30 and 29 days alternately, b u t in a period of th irty years , it i sfound necessary to intercalate the last month eleven times so as
to b e reckoned 30 days instead of 29 . The months retain theirArab ic names in all Muhammadan countries, as follow s
148 H indu Calendar.
92 . Th e Hindus reckon by solar years, and luni
solar m onths. The ir prmmpal aera is that of th e Kali
Yug , of w hich th e year 4947 expired ab o u t th e 1 1th
of April, A.D . 1846,at w h ich period their ne w year
generally c omm ences.
a . The Hindu year i s div ided into tw elve equal portions, w h ichmay be called solar month s ; bu t all festivals and dates are
reckoned , not by these simple months , b u t by the duration ofthe moon w h ich terminates in each . Hence, although the monthba isabb begins de jure about the 1 l th of April, it may havecommenced de facto from one day to tw enty-eight days sooner .W hen tw o new moons occur during one solar month , w h ichhappens once in three years, there is an intercalary month, and
the month so intercalated receives the name of the one w h ichpreceded it
,that i s
,of the solar month w ithin w h ich the tw o
new moons may happen .
b . B esides the aera of the K a li Yuy, the Hindus in thenorthern half of India reckon from the time of a renow nedprince by name Vikramaditya w h o lived (or died) about 57years before the commencement of our aera . Another commonaera is that of a prince named Salav ah ana, w h ich commences 7 8years afte r the b 1rth of Christ . Several other aeras are in u se
in certain parts of the country, for a full account of w h ich thereader m ay consult a profound w ork devoted entirely to thesubject, entitled Kala Sanka lita , 4to . Madras
,1825 .
Tbc H ind li So lar M ont/ts.
December
January
Oc tOber Feb ruary
w March .
u jfille August
v f‘or, l,g September
1a s; I
v ei l November
{fi gm fi fi i w fl a ij
w fi afi fi i ‘
m fir
fi t fi fi fi fi v fi fi a t fi % v fit fi fif v fi i afl
gar. affirm fiv a fi fi fl afi w i v fi fi a
fi W ga afi fi wfi w fiffi
fi aw fi m m fl'
fi afi e fi m m fi fi %
fi gm , a fi i fi 7fi % ? Hafi wjfiv tmfi
W arm ?? {H m fi gfi fi m m fi
ar mamfirr i fi fim v w fifl ifi a m fi
wfit i fi fi,m l fi fitfi fiW - fim fi § 6
W WW . fi t arm fi m , flm l éfi fi
m fi fifififi flfifi w fi fl m,§ fi fl fl
a’
fi afin
i i amafi mm'
fi aafrfi gm'
fi é w g ififfirt
Ha? 11m m W ar 153 11 ané rr an fi ‘aiz rfifiaf
{Ew an i n an an é}? mart 31 s e at fax-Jrm , { a
K ON$153, fa? an i n? atfi m3 , fir m i ( 113. arr 154W ,
[1
w w w tg fi w “s exum c-w -
rw
3151 0 W “ bu
t g i g?rm c.,q j
fi g: w
J ?! q u i) ; “he“? “ff -
35; M y
)ub ‘H
Js zfl?
{ wfi jjm g tsjé z w p ggi fi mfl w w fl w
M w i JM ; w ue gg g ,
-sw f g xé w g
L?“z“ “3‘x"W f m u ? =x=u ‘ffl f W 315
J) ? uéf fl '
fle w f ém—W fi
g ? gym gagk m u fi m fi g w éw
J ‘W JJ ' fi ‘éxf jé ujw fi E
UW 52W u‘
f‘” it“;
“if ‘é
é éb g fi w ‘sg f é j
w b gfi hfifi * v
15‘s“Ur }, u w
w é fi ‘éfP - Ki u k é flfe‘fi
U“are: J) ‘J) ‘ in? 3 E}? J)‘ Ufa? w b ‘
95 LL:
I
U };
u‘éé
g hfi é sw obé w éb j i fig \ &Skgo g éflz
L959 ) ? u; Wield an“? x? “$1 33 £554, n i us
; ‘365
£9n M “6 5«£n v i gsfi
‘f'fl" u ‘wsfl ifl‘
? un 5 b;
& éhfifl é w w fi z f tf“
4 ) v Esau? g,g»asne w a gig 4 1V
,esu,$9 a t“; art;
Hg 5K” ? as d b fi y p
as“?$1
395}
fish/
M 0?J) ‘ R5 9
;
f r“? G59“;,j u j f
-
u W M »sf
M ” 3 51,
db) : L; 6& ,g a t“ 4 h» JMgT a na
, us u p
w e»flw j ux54 5q i cm
jsm, 34s
mw fi tgsw fléjfi m & xuw u tangy a,
“
“4 6
”a} C5!)
usW “S h
e“ B? GU) ? ‘Jfixi
‘Efi ét” W
0.
a” ; u w fig u b
'
fu» M y Ase g
iromu m
i éw aLT {g asW N W ” ; éb m”
91»L5 9 3
cu
g; Qge f g oi
'
Qifjm us w }
:u
“!00 / I
u}; ) \s w jns a; at:up mid sxy s w ? u g
ly “4 3
M “L; =x=gm? u
u i éJsfl (
a
db £ 33w UJ‘33K; q flffi ‘
us“ F f
J) ‘ lb w.
) é z fi fl °fi ufiy
uéfi"? fi‘Jgf ’
éé bb uak u fl ‘fl éé
‘ df r}
a f fi zsw ‘b fis w fi M;& ‘ 5
ug dfi M
5 é w w ‘n ‘“fi w flzgé “95 $7 1
,o gu w g
mi am b q i lé gj ‘xfsb‘
aegiflg
Hh fi f gfw flagw u w m gu a g e & ‘ w
nfi
’
W d‘fgff‘e
- f w gb * w g—é uf
' "
«3 393 95 M y é u y f
‘b j ufi fi fl ‘fi 6M
u“) Lei” :
5 J‘P ‘ 9 U " J)‘“48 ‘i u’“,
5w ) ; u ‘
rxsg gb w n w flg u z b fl s d u w
-
g° b; g d f
n fé“é fiés? W fl btfifi Ji f fi é ék j
uég i fi afg éo
jfl jj se WJ JQs
w é ufi
é'
w ‘”5a“
,
w u—flu fl eff ? ‘
fl fi'
u s?» 5" “3
4 6: $860 é‘di
w émé L7H 40
«kid
95) xi ‘P J r’
g,g u t
,
»u“”L5 09 fl J“?
J JLb ’ J w ig
-
é Ag RS W9. wM K
u xjj u
urci xs w as w fi v m
o
B aas
w ¢ w usuc
w afl t=fii mg m w
fi w
f ? UM AG) ! ‘cf G":B L5 M figw
‘ ‘J" J ?“W M
g tiMA’
JU‘ w
; M fi a g‘e u fi‘‘u rl fi b‘wfi ‘érib
Jf‘ d é ufi J
é
fi w éfi ‘Bw JPfi Jg‘é
Q dfé iw uéw k ufll seéu
w bfi xdfi
w w
V” K u b s éa \ w fi w \ +53a u }
“343 g“whyg
55A ; W M “ {VJJ‘w JS W
fi
w gi ‘fflzfsix.
“ J) ‘gs”)“gr?
u“ U' "M
13 65
E59 d b.
A: j } ) b J) \ w jmqf: uw o
:65gm
“5Lg
“‘JS)D UW f
‘fl afl fi u
é u u s; L5 71 w w fi fi fifiéfl ‘ “ gfl jb’f fi M y"
J i L935; w fi j‘w é éb w ‘ bw
J ?“W
,stz w Q3,“g
o
'
u uwLi ke M y
,
F M Jj’
EUJfi‘j i
w é uéf J Jm =N e
°
f w a
gmg w xg q»
J au ab
FT"
w éw tsfid ‘b ‘bé»fi dd s ih uxk éb é u
r u f f
uW ) J‘ C5"
ru e
/“eu
‘u
~ ° a“
aims“‘5 “
s“
w n ‘jj‘ g é h -éf wu d
g fi‘M
rW fi
ub ‘J—e: L5
» 85gm ; E34 um“;
& ‘w
w
gi g g
lfl éumdfi F
‘
& w ‘u rffi é dr u
xi fl ‘
l
—u e r“;
vhf-G
2M
& ‘gw
’
iu ew w esg w
Ago d im; rja o xi s q s w “you
“fl);
aw 0.x Ja w b
dfiw w u lfi
¢ ; db } fl y
uflw f rlé
Bf da l
'
uggéf z u ’UJ‘ w
; keg) Ju g}I
swa g , w g; 3 us Ag, L5
“ a;
“w uss su »
s at» a ; ass-
saw s
Ld h egj w it“: fi‘ t W u w f r
flb é
gig“of“? w) ”5 “
1és q" ,
g ym"W E$b
e
,yp w w sm; Qi b k 70b
u p,” csw ggédfi r
w A » ef u M m a» a M‘fw
M W u‘Sj ‘géfl rfi ‘g
Lé w w ‘guf jif u jVi be-g)
xg gf éw fi m mgu
a w axw gb‘
m lééw w w gy Je w u
-§J fi éu
’
flfl f fi gfl
Jfiuméegx qj hi w w gfé‘éw w égfl w x
“
a!“:‘Uréfl b éfi‘
i L; J )? u“
w‘affi g
‘i"?
M cfi‘
fi i f tfl fl i ‘
w
gf g fl { M 4 185}? as
J; ‘gd fléw u u : gdw a}; 5 N? g w efi
b; f J‘P ‘ 0 -1$110 asM W ed i t»
rm
$0 355 QW L’TJEQW ss JJ/
ku i w fi gflé jj
53‘ w w i g}; gmJ us g w'
m m i w a» w
@ W \ fi d t W usw é éfi w s ofi
n é34. uééhf 42; s th ew ?w g uageI I I
b éj w dj yéfi j fisé‘
id g ‘
u fis
jgwswUAfl?
I o l /o w o I o I
nff )“9515-5” J 6 19 433 “ 53 “f “ (Dr
N 4}: ”"u
‘éf U‘ZJ” UH“? Jr Jr fi -z" f : w e) é,
qfikv w &gqn ju .
xx w h o M33“
?
d ”
w ,
“”fl
;Ma:
5 5W «5 ég‘fl “J “ ‘e?
z)“ 4
3“J 4;
m il e}t fKu-
f& x‘
“A ? 4 35 w w }{Ea-ffi‘W g ? Q a w " w t“:
o f fi‘fofié u v f‘ fi
géé bfl
éssfé‘W ES-mi 448-1‘5QM ; éu w
a; w ?) “A,
“ W “u b ‘r'
g ; W L5 ? L5 v i és
‘g JJ‘
gsJ ib ) “F“? w ait-f13‘ J ib“? s-i u jfw g J) ‘
meW M m g m; a gm»
«its? J‘aab dfis‘w g
m; 95uxf‘jp f
‘; w ebs.»
uffbw eff; U $933, 9
5 UP)? of ur lf w ‘
b 4 35; W A? a: 3 0 3J; $9 a.» y ou
0 0 ? 7
w t}a r ‘th e )
“ e b g di e ) ; w im c w glw
W er ‘f ‘Lf" +9 Via) ;
se gub b
j d w b at jf eflfl fl s‘
v é fi éI 0 0 /
ggrxa g glém
m 3 u -‘i éfl flrg ! Li ke d “
fi h a é fl‘ bh f w d w b ¢ h3w L>LA
fl“ édfi eff) ; gs W $31) L? heiffiflgfi
w w ujg ‘
} j gfi o fl d wfl é xb ab
uLp z b or
£5 0 ? ‘f‘
r’fl i
Jf b fi’ 5 1
19 gm“; g
flfi ‘éfi UM.
w fl fi g w g éf w f w u 59)“ni
..r I y o o o I
g imsfl xq sxém lé
d
g g d f g fl ffi w k fi ° 5
5 75 ? g
i ’
f’
uéf «éfl f ‘ L
vsa gf
ffi g
fi< ‘e—(Ad
a w in «é i f} Ju d r u sfl r‘gf z u fi fi w
fé»
m as w uts ili; a v q $ 142w Kg;
‘fi j é w lf fis’b w
fi
w 4 33“fi—(fi‘u I ,
I
“Alsk ksb éd
i t fi'
f f jfi‘ “63
2
76?LZJL’ éf fl—
Ljflfi
’
ffi
d ‘
“gy é fifi ‘fi u
wW Q fi w ‘
u’ g
b i
j
té‘
sf‘f qé‘z f Léf
‘V ? “ x53]
a ?Ju w
sbgu xj,
fi w éfi w M 1: a m ) A» w ‘ w w
B ub « as - Lw
’
w w} ; JA E—aw w fiia
w w i’
j fi ata ; w u g é w n éfiau m
15 9 3114 mgflimj Q L m Ay fi
as as? g» w 35QLabs 3 Au Kb} Aw
d ef y
Pb
i agm g u
us iw b éw g fi cm
fig é up q w
“sub
fl f’ f I I
ga s ufibéz é u w . é?I 00
w e» as e » w k ; w»; é u mA) ; asw }?m l;
JD“?W uf ‘fw 4 A? é k fiw m a 4 , w s ,s55
9 ,3 d glar‘su
uWD‘é-N S
“gf é qfl séé’uefi-QH“flu QBg
fi x 0 4 «w $1? Lew ;-
u~
y8~53 asw - kgffi ux,
“4 &2 w l u *g5; k “25 JLKé ‘g-sW J
‘Ji ‘f
b e»
55—3“ér jj- bg P 9oj
sg53 U32'? g
a
r“Lek—é
5 A QQJQUaséy w égafim é‘y
-ZN
“w ; “m y w w w é éfiéw w
w‘fi r
b g ag cfi “3" use!”
gfxi‘
e?
3 9 5W: w w 1* g u3 w ujo
I
0
g ia‘a“
é 1 3, 95, H5
“?of g ig) m
“
9 33; cw w fiw egw am ‘f’ggfiflgh figj
q u a? d dyi n g u nq » 452?g a w k M 2,
é° rh 53¢ 3
6€- Lv‘w f
“J“é‘éf fi é - uw’
e
w ‘sf fi d'i yf J1fi *
q ¢f
VOCAB ULAR Y.
N.B .
—Th e letterm . signifiesmascu line, f. fem inine, a . active, n . neu ter.
It h as not been deemed necessary to give th e names of th e
different parts of speech, except w hen a w ord belongs to m orethan one division . In th e Hindu stani w ords and phrases, k
stands/for
:
karnii, h for bond, d for denii, j forjc'
im'
i, and l forlent}. Th e letters a
, p , s, and h , at th e end of each definition,denote respectively th e Arab ic, Persian, Sanskrit, or Indianorigin of th e w ord explained .
g al ab, now,presently ; ab talc,
till now ; ab-kc'
i, of now , of th e
present time . 3°
Lal 66, m . w ater, lu stre . p
ln l ibtidc'
z,f. b eginning . a
“fledabh c’
igi , ill-starred
, w icked . 3
G el abh
'
i,j ustnow , imm ediately. 3
fi lfi
aber, m . time, delay. h
g trip , self; selves ; you rhonou r. sd fi l ap u trak, ch ildless. s
l fi'l ap arc
’
rd/z, m . fau lt,trans
gressw n . 8
U 4 &p as, ou r, you r, themselves,one another ; &p as-men, am ongthemselves, &c . s
w lup astlait,arriv ed,present. 3
Li l apna , b elonging to self, ow n . 3
LS Ll ii p ahu nch na, n . to arriveat. it [strip ofl“. s
Ujb
’
l u tc'
irnc'
z , a . to cau se to descend,
j lu ttar,m . an answ er; th e north . 3
u tarna,n . to descend
,to
alight . s
Glfi l ittiffilgazz, accidentally . a
ki ditne’
z, so m u ch, so many . 3
«u
l (ifit, eight. 8li leiil uglz
'
dnc'
z, n . to lift or raise up,
to take aw ay . 3
Mi u thnc’
i,n . to rise u p, to be
abolished , togo aw ay ; utfijc'
inc'
z ,
n . to depart . s
glfi l (18 7256
,in th e m idst, in th e
course of. a
Iii asar
,m . impression, effect . a
0 -day. s [ders. a
g'
jc'
zz at, f. perm ission, or
u ?‘aj z , an interj ection , to call
or bespeak attention , as,Sir
,
hark you ! it [w ell . 8
leis-l aclzcfi/zc
'
i , good , excellent,
obi m lAfimad th e capitalofGuj erat . p
Gw lafimalc, very foolish, a fool . a
Jif i alzw c'
z l,m . condition, circum
stances, events. a
alf a l l m . con trivance,invention . a
a i
-l ifi tiyfir,m . ch oice,pow er. a
filtfij r,last
,at last, th e end . a
u p TéMira t, f. fu tu rity , a fp
[tor. p
w F ‘T6161117 72, m . teacher, preceptu re state . a
lol adc'
z, f. perform ance, payment,
b landishm ent . a
b u lQl u dc'
is, grieved, dej ected . s
u al adab, m . institu te , politeness,
m anners ; plu ra fiddb, cerem o
nies, &c . a
94 0 i &dmi
,m . f. a descendant of
Adam,a human b e ing (man or
Wom an), people .~ a
mi x"
&dfic'
z , half. 3
jb al u dizar, th ither. lz
d l idbar, h ither. II.
Cfimol ad/zz'
k, m ore , exceeding. 3
Us l ad/zyc’
m ii or adbyc'
i- lenc'
i, a.
to’ halve . h
w lj l irdda, m . desire, purpose . a
c'
zrfim,m . comfort, health, re
pose . p
43) arth,m . sub stance , pu rport . s
Jjj l Ezrz fi ,f. w ish , desire, w ant. p
353} Elm-
i f it,m ou nted , riding. s
lJljl u riinii, a . to dissipate, squ an
der ; to cau se to fly, 3lijl an d, n . to fly
,to soar u p .
—s
o‘
ji'
c
'
z z fzd , free, solitary, a herm it . pufdjjl dz u rdag
'
z'
, f. affl iction ; displeasu re , v exation . p
J el oj l s. f. a z mc'
zjs/z , trial . pU.. l us, that ; is, th is ; inflections
of th e pronou ns w u h and yih
is-meri, during th is, in th e meantime . It
2 Ll
w l Eis, f. hope , desire, reliance . s
ul j fisc
’
in,easy facility . p
9 ; l asbc’
zb,m . cau ses
, goodsand chattels. a
alw lu stéd,m . a teacher, master. 1)
jlm i z a l istifsci r, m . search ing forinformation
,inqu iry . a
Q ljfi lisriif, m . prodigality, ru in . a
(112ml is-garafi, in this m anner ;as-garalz, in that m anner. it a
g ala -l is-liye, on th is accou nt . it
“3t &smén,m . th e sky, th e fir
mam ent,heaven . p
l l asw a' r, riding, mou ntedasw c
’
iri , act of rid ing. s
beh a lja l isw c
'
zsge, for th is reason ;u sw c
’
zsfie , for that reason .
M l asis (or (3373) f. a bened iction . 3
ap lél islz iira , m . a hint, a signal . a
Jlji b l asler
'
dr, m iscreants, scou n
drels. a
g ym ashrfif, nob les, grandees ;aslzrc
'
if z c'
id i , dau ghterof a grandee . a
‘éfi l ashrafl ,f. a gold coin so
called . Th e Calcu tta ashrafiis w orth a gu inea and a half. 1)
MTdsi mc'
i, an acqu aintance , lover,
friend . p
Jflcw l isgaba l, m . a stab le . a .
dual a§ l, .f. root,origin, fou nda
tion,capital . a
Jral asi l, noble . (as to b lood or
origin). a
tlllal it
u
to
i lii’
,f. manifesting, declar
ing ; investigation, know ledge . a
an
cafpmfi l andlzeri , f. darkness. 3
m and udes/ea , m . thou ght, su s
picion, anxiety. 1)
wu l insc
'
in, m . m an,a human
being, mankind . a
5723 27 , m . a tear. s
q u i inséf, m . equ ity, ju stice . 0.
in’
r
'
im,m . a present, a gift. at
inkc'
ir,m . refusal
,denial . a
$7 c'
nikk, f. th e eye . 3
Ji ll migal, m . a finger’
sbreadth . s
0Kil l m igli , f. a finger. s
33 0 o
Uga
jfi l angugh z , f. a mu g w orn
00 on th e finger. 3 .
”(El angz
'
tr, m . a grape . 79
AL.” (mand, m . j oy, happiness. 3
ai l and w fi i l ink and inh ofi, same
aswl in u nh , and u nfimi, same
as an,q . v . b
jlj l aw az , f. noise, sou nd , voice . 1)
ufibjlau bc
'
tsfi,dissolu te, depraved pJi fil fip ar, u p, upw ards, u pon . 3
” l or, f. direction, side . It
”l aur
,conj . and, b u t ; adj. more,
aur ku clzh , any th ingelse . ll [of m ind . it
uh) anse
'
m , m . cou rage, presenceQ1» )Jlmay, m . a camel . hlgsl-fincbc
'
z,h igh , height. 72
fiel fih iir,m . food , su b sistence . s
db l ai d, m . people . a
Lgal a i , 0 ,
Oh . p h
All Ayyc'
tz , a man’
s name . a
Li l a isé, su ch as this, so . Ir
C_<gl ek, one ; art. a or an, frs
qu ently j oined to its substantive,as “p i l l ek-din, one day. 3
other
bl) bri be-
z , father, son, sir. a
Eel? bc'
ip ,m . father. a
w ig bét, f. a w ord , affair ; batku h te h i
,on th e speaking of a
w ord,imm ediately ; bai t—ch i t, f.
conversation, chit- chat. itob bad, f. Wind . p
z lé db biidshéik, m . a king ; bri dsizc
‘
z l fi,royal. p
g ob bc'
id i , m . a complainant,Speaker. 8
L>lg biijné, n . to sou nd , to ring 3
jg m . load, fru it ; time ,door, w ater. p
at}; bZira/z , tw elve . It
jig bfiz , back ; bi z - find, to decline,reject ; s. m . a haw k . p
Jlj
’b béz c'
zr, m . a market ; baz arz ,
one w h o attends a market . p“fi le béz i , f. play, sport,a game . p
ud l? balsam , m . a basin , plate,dish
, gob let, pot, &c . I:
Jl.»bil l, m . hair. 3 . ear of com ,
12. w ing . 17
ill.) bfilé, ab ove, u p, high . p
a n.mm ,m . a boy. 3
,llg bélfi, f. sand . 3
,
d b l: bc'
miiti , made of broad cloth ,w oollen, it
ulfg l Ema
—m, m . faith , belief, reli
gion, conscience . a
J lAi lA dimt'
in-ddr, faithfu l, honestzman li mit, to believe . p
w i l l: bZiritnEi, a . to share , to distrib u te, to divide ; bliiz t-l to divideand take . 8
M ai l: bandhnc'
i, a . to b ind,to
shu t u p ; to frame . 3
Kl ban/vii, foppish, impu dent . sof }; bfi- w ujfid, notw ith stand
l u g . p
) )l€ ba
'
tw ar,m . credit, faith ; 6&
w ar-k,to b elieve . p [side . 3
fol.» bdh ir or bfifiar, w ithou t, ou t
ral: békam ,
together. p
o ld bibc'
id,m . qu arrel, fight . 3
w bip at, f. m isfortu ne , calam ity . s [teach . It
li ly ba tc'
mc'
z, a . to point ou t, to
usebu tt
'
z'
,f. a candle, lamp. 3
Ulefii.’ big/16nd, a . to cau se to sit,
to seat . kUlll$ bajé-liinii, a. to perform ,
carry into effect . I:l t bajc
'
inc’
z,a . to sou nd , to play
on.a m u sical instrument . 3d k x
bc‘
z -jae or baja, in place , ln\ stead of. pQK byT,
f. lightning. h
s bajna , n . to b e sou nded,to
sou nd . 3
b lag bujlzc’
m ii, a. to explain, extin
gu ish (a candle). hbg bich ftrfi, helpless, w retched . 1)
Mg : bacizc'
im'
i, a . to sav e,protect. klu g! bachnfi, n . to be saved, to
escape . 71
«kg : baclzcha, m . an infant, a child,th e young of any creatu re . p
lilac bichkiinc'
i, a. to Spread . s
A
JAK : bakj skisk, f. gift, grant,forgiveness. p
s s‘ bakfiashnfz, or bakh slz-d , or
bakhsb isk-k, a . to give, to bestow . p
Lsta g : bakhsiz
'
i,m . a general, a
commander in ch ief. pJ
‘
s : bu lgh j, m . avarice,stinginess,
parsim ony . a
M balcly l, a . a m iser, niggard . a
A.» bad, evil, bad ;pounds, as bad-
gri t, a rascal ;ill-disposed ; bad-sw a t,
ugly, ill-favou red . p
cea si ng bad u nfortu nate ,Wicked . p
we,» badan, m . th e body . p
wip es; buddh iw c
'
in, w ise, intelligent . 3
Q5“? bad i , f. badness, evil . plu gbidyc
'
z,f. science, know ledge . 8
u sed in com
bar, f. bosom , produ ce ; prep.
u pon . p
l}; bu
rc
'
z , bad , w icked . h
f l}? barébar, equ al, like , level . p
gas/J}; barébari’
, f. equ ality ; competition . p
g ob} ;bar-béd-k or bar-brid-d
,a .
to cast u pon th e w ind ; to destroy or w aste . p s
l}; lb .) bar-
pé-k, to exc ite . p
M U): britfint
,m . affair, c ircum
stance . s
bartan, m. a dish, plate ,vessel, u tensil. h
E}?B raj, name of a district. 71;
j aw s} ; bar-Marcian happy ; \
a
term applied to a son (p. p
baras, m . a year. s
c an) ; barsat,
‘
rain,th e rainy sea
son . 3
bam snc
’
z , n . to fall (as rain),to show er. 3
u }; b'
aran,n1 . colou r
,complexion . s
rm};bar/1am,
offended,confused
,
angry . p
Uh}? biriyc'
iri, f. time . it
l}; bag'
c
'
i, large , great ; adv . very . s
q b ban greatness. s
Ute}; bag‘lzfiné
, a. to increase, topromote . 8
Lb} bag'hnc
'
z , n . to increase . 3
L“? 6613 , enough , ab u ndantly . p
l q bistér,m . extent, latitu de . 3
L552“ ? basti , f. an abode, a village . 3
A:U“ ? bisan-
p ad, a song in praiseofVishnu . s
Ujfl bisurnc
’
i,n . to w eep, to sob . 71
wjla,» bafiira t, f. sight, vision, a
M ba’
d, after, afterw ards, at th e
'
end . a
ua
’
agbar’
s,som e , certain ones. a
wa s.) ba
’
g e orba’
z i,som e , certain .a
M ba’
id,remote, far off. a
Ji g bug li a l, s. f. th e armpit . pxiv bag ltair, ad . w ithou t
,besides
,
except. a
Jlfigba lclcc'
z l, m . a grain-merchant,a shopkeeper. a
ljfig bakrc
’
z, a h e
-
goat . [goat. sbakri
,f. a goat, a female
ultiébale/2672 , m . explanation . s
ll; ba le-
1,f. calam ity . a
6 1 le.
Ull: bu land,a: to call for
,to sum
m on . it billénfi,to cry.
ail: balki , yea, on th e contrary . p
Az lg bu land, h igh , lofty. p
bi lli,f. a cat. 3
ba-martaba, in a degree ,
considerably . p
bumz'
tjib, by reason,on
accou nt . a
Qg'
bz'
n, w ithou t . 3
banana, a . to make. p
C: banaj, m . trade , traffic . 3
as.) band-k,to shu t u p, to make
fast . 1) b
Jag bandagi , f. slavery , service ,devotion . p
05n band/51051715, a . to cau se tobe fastened . b
law bannb’
, n . to be made . It
to cau se to bemade . it
6
1
: ban'
i, pl . sons, ch ildren ; ban?
I srci fil, th e Israelites. a
log : b anyé, m . a
'
shopkeeper,merchant. sbojb , m . a load; w e ight . 71
45.-
jg bfijb , understanding, idea . 8
lag-
jg biijbm'
i,a . to understand ,
comprehend . 3
U) : balnd, to speak, say. [2
Li): band
,a . to so w , plant . 8
&3 ba , by, w ith, in ; ba-nisbat, w ithregard to . p
LY? bakt’
i,111 . price, v a‘lu e .
'
p
at. see blaéklzc'
z . s
lgflg: bbékhé, f. langu age , dialect . ItM lgg bin
-
1371725, to speak, say. 3
“bf : B zrbal, name of one of Ak
bar’
s m inisters. b
w big, tw enty. kbe-slzumc
'
zr, incalcu lab le . p
ljau: be-karar, uneasy, restless.ap
&Jlf; begana, strange, undomestic,fore ign . p
begam (fem . of beg) a lady. p
bai l, m . a bu llock. b
Jug b
'
imér, sick, a patient. pN
,f. sickness. p
benda,crooked
,absu rd . h
l)” bJaura ,m . accou nt, h istory . 8
Uz’
lxb p ap osh , f. a slipper. p
d ab p c'
it, m . a m illstone . b
sw ab pads/lab , m . a king (sameas badsbab). p
jgp ar, m . th e opposite bank ;adv . over, beyond ; par 351, lastyear. 3
w k!pas, near, before . b
M , p c'
iki z a , clean , fine, elegant .pJli pal, m . a shade, shelter. b.Qmi p b lki , f. a sedan chair,common in India. 12 [accept . 3
Li l) p ana, a . to get, find,reach,
6b pane/z , fi v e . 3
lw b p anda, a m aster, a priest . s
,Jl.’ p au w , m . leg, foot . 3
gal.»p ant , m . w ater ; lu stre . s
L.»p a tta, m . a leaf. 3
fl p a ttbar, m . a stone . 3
L533p att
'
i,f. a leaf ; hemp. s
(
“
f-lg p ew /ads, ,fifty. b
:3-6,
pasbu (orp asu), m . an animal,beast. s
l i p ukc'
zrnii,a . to call aloud
,to
b aw l,to cry ou t. It
bjfii p akay‘
m’
z , a . to catch orse iz e bJlefni p a le/2&1, f. a leathern bag forcarrying w ater. 3
55k; p injrc’
i,m . a cage . s
w figp anqfi tmleam ed brahman . 3
he }:p itch/ma, a . to ask . 3
” g, p aur, f. a door, gate . 3
bitp firc’
i,fu ll
,accomplished . s
5u i p u ri , f. a kind of cake . 3
c a n); post, rn . poppy ; p osfi , one
w h o intoxicates h im self w ith infu sion of poppy . p
gift-taxp osbdk, f. vestments,dress,hab its, garm ents. p
lt z
’, pabdg
‘
,m . a m ou ntain . b
we; p h age-
z , rent, torn (from p batné,n . to be rent). 3
b ig -
vi pa bcb c'
mnc'
i,a . to know
,to
recogniz e . s
I t). pabar, m . a space of abou tthree hou rs
,a w atch (of th e day
or night). pp b ir, again f back . h
UJQ p b irnd, n . to tu rn back
,
retu rn . it
due p ba l, m . fru it,effect, adv an
tage, progeny . s
Mp ab lc'
z or, p ab ilc
’
i , first, before ,rather ; p akle, at first, prev iou sto'. b
w e, pba lnfi , n . to bear fru it, to ’
b e
produ ced . 3
laq
S lfi p abuficbm’
r,n . to arrive . b
9 l
W p abannc'
i,a . to pu t on, to
w ear. It
law
-3 p ab iyd, m . a w heel (o f a
chariot, 11
136517723 7 , b ack, again . It
Uf fi p/zerna or p h er dena, a . to
c ircu late , to gi ve back . it
13 Jolt ; p iyada-
p c'
i,on foot
, as a
pedestrian . p
Ari pydr, m . affection . s
Uri p iyc'
irc'
i,dear, beloved . 3
Lake; p iyc'
w c-
z , th irsty . s
£34 33p et, m . th e b elly,stomach
,
w omb . s
‘éir’ p z tb , f. th e back . 3
he ; p a ithna , n . to ru sh in,to
enter. 3 [ing. it
leg ; p i cbbfi , m . pu rsu it , followqjlgs gi p i cbb c
'
zfi,f. th e h inder
part . b
p i c/tbe, after,in th e rear
,
i n pu rsu it of. bUjglAfi p a idfi
-k,a . to produ ce , to
procu re p aidii-h , ,
to b e born ,to be fou nd . it p
AA
Io p i r mu rsb id, you r ma
j esty, sire . p
pa irbk, m . a sw imm er. b
Uj
‘
f l’. p
airnft, n . to sw im . b
Luv p
aisc'
i , m . a copper coin ,m oney, cash . it
M i pisn ii, a . to grind, tritu rate . s
peg/1a , m . trade , profession . p
filialp aigjgam ,
m . a m essage . p
p a iman , m . a prom ise, an
oath,
Q‘ QQ
( 10 ) 9)
U K? tiib, pow er, endu rance . p 0
8 b tébi’
,m . su bj ects a
h ill? tép nfi,~ a . to w arm one ’
s self
b efore a fire . 3
zD'U téz a
,fresh , new , fat, green,
you ng, happy . p
tb z’
z
’
, Arab , Arab ian . a
la“? téknfz , a . to look, stare at. s
&5 U tc'
t-ki,so that
,to th e end
that . pda b
.
tc’
i,ammu l, m . m editation,re
fiection, pu rpose . a [c ian . 3
M i? Tfin-sefi , name of a mu sig fi i tab, then , at that tim e , after
w ards tabbi se, from that veryt im e . s
3L? tabéb , ru ined, lost ;to be in m isery . p
gas:tujb , inflection of til , thou . b
g h a r tabg'
z'
l,f. acqu isition . a.
u n i s“:talcfit, m . a throne . p
A3 tad , conj . or adv . then . it
I f” ; tadbir
,f. deliberation , cou n
sel, management . a
tabiib - lz,
13 tar, m oist ; J ag1 3 tar ba tar, all
w et or w eltering. p
w asto shave
,to shape ou t. p b
tardsbnc‘
z , a . to cu t or clip,
Tu rk”.
o f or b elonging to
[qu iv en it
Leg}? targp bna , n . to trem b le ,tis (inflec t. of so ), w hich ; tis
p ar, w hereupon . It
J . ) tasa lfz'
,f.
sooth ing . a
consolation,
3 M trou b le, privation . a
(pm tasdi lc, f. verifying, attesting . a [image a
1 04 " tagw ir
,f. a pictu re ,
ta z lz'
z'
lc, f. rid icu le , sport a
U )1x; ta
’
rif f. praise,description .a
(”b y ta
’
51m,f. reverence
,honou r
1ng . a
wjlfu
’
tafci w u t, m . distance,dis
tinction,difference . a
Uz i ) tafannu n, m . recreating, refresh ing . a
Ulfii’ takbz c’
z , m . demanding, exacting , u rgency . a
ra w talcgi r, f. fau lt, crime ,blam e . a
$3 ta lc, postp . u p to, as far as. h
6. . d talca lluf, m .
pomp . a [ance . a
4 413 taklif, f. troub le, annoyWUta lasb
,f. search
,seeking . a
ta lak, u p to (sam e as ta lc). b
Jljlfi ta lw c
'
tr,f. a sw ord . s
ta law w u n-mi z bji , f.
ceremony,
fickleness of d isposition . a
tum, you (tum/z and tumbmi
in th e inflection). 11law tambsbc
‘
z,m . an entertain
m ent,show ,
spectacle, sight ;minds/
"
165m spectator. a
U“0
11W tamas/z bzn, a spectator. p
PM tambm
,entire
, perfect, com
plete . a [drum . a
ly e? tambz
’
lrfz, m . a kind of
W tam/11d , f. su bterfuge , sh ift. a
tan -[171i ,ab , f. w ages, salary . p
J: to or tau
,adv . then ; tit, pron .
thou . lz
l:>
bL> J'
a tdm'
i , a . to point ou t, toteach . 3
Ln? as many (as), h owm any soever. It
J'
u de'
t,separate , apart . p
Lr" file, th e inflection of th e re
lat. jo , w h o , w hich . 72
li lf>jagana , a . to w,
aken torou se u p. 3
fi g jagab , f. place , qu arter, room ,
vacancy,stead . b
all? ja lléd, m . an execu tioner,cru el
,hard-hearted . a
Ala J'
a ld,
expeditiou s, qu ick,qu ickly . p [ness. p
ja ld'
z'
,f. qu ickness, rash
Li z-ja lnii , n . to bu rn
,to be kin
dled to get into a passion . s
sk ja lw a , m . light ; ja lw a-
gar,
brilliant,b eau tifu l . p
rlq
-
J'
a lew f. retinu e,attendance . a
t" ? jam f. a congregation, collection
,n umbersum total
,
jam ~ k or rakbnfi or - kar- rakb
mi,to collect ; to be- boné,
collected . a
fi jan ,m . a person, individu al . 3
u jins, f. genu s, goods, comm odity. a [w ood . 3
J'
anga l, m . a forest, a
f jo , (re l. pron .) h e w h o ; jo-ko7 ,
w hosoever ; J'
o
soever. b
w hat
m . barley ; j6, if, w hen ;J°
z7,
[bling . s
l) ? J
’
it'
fi ,m . a yoke ; dice , gam
search ing. p s
g y ja w db, m . an answ er. a
“,q jau'iin
, you ng, a you ng Person ja w c
'
m-mard i,valou r. p
élfi jai obni , f. you th , or ratherthat period of life to w h ich th eR omans applied th e term juv entus. p
Jmq jaw bb ir, f. (plu . offly ),
gems, j ew els ; jaw bb ir- kh c’
ma ,
a j ew el- hou se or treasu ry . a
n mfi jau bafi ,m . a j ew eller. a
i zl tfi , m . a shoe . It
C i )? J'
otik, m . astrology . s
a n astrologer. s
as”? Ju tz , a Slipper, a small
shoe . 7;
L3? J'
otnc'
i , a . to yoke . It
Ujf jorna, a . to j oin , clasp. It
u ) ? Jon orJ
'
a w i,w hen, as ; J
'
07i
km or jami—h’
in, th e instantw hen . it
J a z mp br, nam e of a c ity . 8
jig J'
bt'
zr,m . b u shes ; continu ed
rain . b
jfi jlez jlzérjlzar, f. a thicket . It
J‘Lfi
- ja/zfi z , m . a ship . a
w lLfi-jabélat, f. ignorance . a
u w jabdn, m . th e w orld jam-
mi ,
of or belonging to th e w orld,mankind . p
UL? jar/2672, w here , in w h ateverplace . It
aLi v hf? jabbfi p andb , m . refu ge
of th e w orld, yo ur m aje sty ! pf. a cymbal . s
Ln > jbdnknc’
i , a . to peep, to
SW 72 a
Li n e? jbaf, qu ickly . it
RSV J'
lzqrokbc
-
z,m . a lattice , a
w indow . 3
s jbagg‘d
,m . w rangling, qu ar
relling. it
Life? n . to qu arrel . ItUM jbamjbamc
’
ztfi , glittering . it [beau ty . It
M Jbamakrii, m . Splendou r,W J
'
lzan, m . a clash ing sou nd of
m etals, &c . b
éijea jbfi tb , false , a lie . s
leg” ; a liar, false . 3
fi fi ,m . life, sou l, m ind : added
"to names
, professions, &c .,it
signifies sir,m aster. 3
w jeb, f. a pocket . tbu : J
'
i td, aliv e, living . 3
Lap -ji tm'
i, a . to w in (at play), toconqu er. s ;
lag-
fi nd, n . to live
,or b e alive . 3
jaisc'
z,in th e manner w h ich
,
as, su ch as. s
Cfigl? c/u'
ibuk, m . a h orse w h ip. p
JL? cbci l, f. w ay, practice . 3
(i fit? cb blci k, active , fleet . pJ ai l? cbéndni
,f. a kind ofcloth
onligh t. s
Lal? cbc’
ibnd, a . to . love, to like ,to desire , to choose ; c/zéb z
'
ye
(in B raj cbci b iyatu), it is fit,
proper, necessary, &c . s
stupid, impu dent . it
ilent, speechless. it
In? cba tw r
,clever ; cba tum ,
z,ex
pertness. s
h w cba tkdnd’
, a . to rend, spl it . it
L563? eb igh i , f. a letter, an
epistle . b
i i}? cbirc‘
zg lz, m . a lamp, a light. pash/l}? cbarc
’
zgc'
ib , f. a pasture , a
m eadow . p
b l}? cbarc
’
m b’
, a . to graz e ; ebu
rcim'
z , a . to steal ; finkbefi ebu
rei né,to w ithdraw th e eyes. 8
Lb}? cbag’bnc
’
i,n . to ascend, to
come u p . it
h is}? cbarbci nci,a . to raise up. [1
lg}? cb ig‘iyc
'
r,f. a b ird . b
q j? cb ig’imbr, a b ird-catcher, a
fow ler. b [tain . 1)
M L? c/zasbma , m . a w ell, a fou n
gli ? cbug ltli , slandering, backb iting . p
c a fe ? cbakit, astonished . s
cbakki,f. a m ill, ,
a m ill?stone . 3
ML? cb illbnc’
i, n . to scream ou t. it
Li? cba lnc'
z,n . to m ove, to go ,
proceed , go off, pass (as coin),
to b e discharged (as a gun) ;cba lbg
’
, to go ; cba lc'
z tocom e . 3
LS »? cbamak, f. brilliancy, glit'ter, beau ty . b [dingly . p
W k? cb u nfincb i , thu s, accor
n cbintc’
z,f. care, anx iety . 8
“KA? changu l, m . a claw ch an
gu l mam a, to grasp w ith th e,claw . p
w e}? c/zau -be, one w h o h as read
th e fou r v edas. 8
cf}? ebop ,f. desire
, selfishness. bQt”? cbaup bya , fou r-footed, a
qu adruped . s
lei ) ? cbau tbé,th e fou rth . 3
J) ? cbor, m . a thief
,a robber. s
lib)? cborénfi, a. to steal. 3
£59 9? f. theft,robbery . s
d) ? c/z i
'
tk, f. defect, error; cbauk,
an Open place in a city . it
cbaukas, expert s
i z cba ugu na , a . fou rfold . s
f ):cboncb
,f. beak
, h ill. 3
d le> ebbatz, f. th e breast ; cbbatt
se lag iina, to embrace . It
leg? clzb z'
pm'
z, n . to be concealed
,
h idden , absent . 7:cbbatri
, f. a covering or
hood ; cbba tri -dci r,covered
,
hooded . s
lifie? c/zbu tfip ci , m . smallness. b
cbibm, m . th e face . p
ebboté, little, small . it
b e? ekkor, m . end
, extrem ity . b
b e” a? cbborniifl . to release
,leave ,
le t go . it
ljgfi ? cfih okarc
’
i, m . a boy. It
cbbed,m . a hole
,an open
ing . s
R'
cb i z , f. a th ing . 1)
cba im'
z,m . a kind of corn . 8 ;
clzenb, m ille t. /l
C
Li n
e-b baJa t, need, w ant . a
“Lab basil, m . produ ce, resu lt,
profit, revenu e [tbsili-ka lcim,
in fine, in short ; basi l-b , tobe obtainedfa
jab Mair, a . present, w illing ;fiésirg aw dbi , ready Wit. a
(5L [id/rim, m . a ru ler. a
Jl> lab], in .state, condition, bu siness
,.
affair, present tim e, a
GAB . fiélat, f. state , condition . a
h
m } fiabsbi , m . Abyssinian,
Caffre . a
was bw
'
ati, cavilling , argu ing
th e point. a
db badd , extrem e, extremely. a
$ 5} !zaraka t, f. proceeding,condu ct . a
basad , f. envy, malice, emu
lation, amb ition . a
bagr, m . rest,repose . a
win .» ba z i a t, you r or h is ma
j esty, your, h is excellency, &c . a
M : bigsa, m . share, lot, portion,
division . a
” 4 2>,ftugiir, m . presence, appear
ance , cou rt ; h is maj esty . a
[la/ple, j u st, tru e th e De ity ;j u stice
,lot. a i fl/ a ff/
éwjlb balcéra t, f. contempt, disgrace , baseness. a .
w i b fiikc'
iya t, f. a history, tnarra tion . a
p
u h ;
L545? Mas/bi
,f. delight, plea
su re . 1)
uJS Maaf, m . fear ; k_ h_anj-k or
Jaka'
nc'
i, to fear. a
L595 kjti mi , a m u rderer, san
gu inary. p
“3i Miyal , m . thou ght, consi
deration phantom ,vision
_k_l_zi
yc'
tl- lr, to fancy fi iyal-rakbna,
to keep in m ind . a
M tg : Miyfina t, f. perfidy, treachery, emb ez z lem ent. a
Jo Ma ir
, good , b est, w ell ; m .
goodness, health . a
Up dat ld da/ch i l- b
,n . to enter, to
arrive . It a
ljlo D iira-sfiukob , a m an’
s nam e ,th e son of Sbabja/zan . p
”lo dam,
f. m edicine . p
ula di m, m . alm s, charity . 3
li b dana, w ise,learned, a sage ; p
g lib dana, i , f. w isdom . p
“Lilo danish ,scrence . 11
M l.) dan islzmand, w ise, a
learned m an . p
f. know ledge ,
,Bld dariw
,m . tim e . 72
chi ld dana,m . grain , seed , speck . p
li ly.) dabana, a . to press dow n . It
llgd du blc'
l,th in , lean , poor. 3
Lg.) dabna, to be pressed . hdalefi l, m . entrance , intru
sion possibility . a
l 16 ) Leo
J.»dar, prep . in u sed in ‘ composition
,as dar-
gugarnb, to passaw ay . p
Jlij d darbar, m . th e cou rt of a
king or prince . p
hale) : darbari , m . a cou rtier. p
UjbU
L
: ,o dar p es/z bond, n . tooc cu r, to aw ait . p
m }: daralgh j,m . a tree
,a stalk.p
w a gs-J o f. application
,requ est
, w ish, desire . p
a}
: dard,m . pain , affl iction, pity . p
éj dj d daridri , poor, m iserable . s
JlSjo darkar
,u sefu l, requ isite . p
we diram
,m . m oney ; a coin
abou t Sixpence in valu e . p
mirv " dar-miyan, in th e m idst ;
betw een . p
daranda or darinda , m . a
beast ofprey . p
g lu e darw iiz a,m . door. p
darog lt, m . a lie . p
ui
wd darw esb , m . a derv ise, a
'
beggar. p
lij d dam/a, m . th e sea,a river. p
D} u lwd daryaft-k, a . to con
ceiv e , u nderstand . b p
das (or dask), ten . 3
w e.) dast, m . th e hand . p
uléj z s o dastar-[gfizpfzm m . th e
cloth on w h ich orientals eat. 1)w e dushman, m . an enemy . p
QM .) clasbmani , f. enm ity . p
‘sLfi
d du sbniim ,f. ab u se . 3 1)
la d du’
a, f. b ened iction , prayer,w ish . a
17
dukb,m . pain , labou r ; dukbi , fication of virtu e ; sire , you r
grieved, affl icted . s maj esty . s
li léo dikb iinc'
i and dikb ldnd, a . life .) d/iarnc
'
i , a . to place , to lay. s
to she w. to po int ou t. 8 K m d/zalcka, m . a pu sh, j olt. 1.
Jo d i l, m . heart, m ind , sou l. pcf
‘w dban , m . w ealth ; d/i ani,
Ulla d ildnd, a . to cau se to give . 3 w ealthy . 3 [trickery . 1,
unit) da- latt
'
i , f. a kick w ith th e Lyman.)
tw o h ind legS it [m ind . 19 u gh.) d/i obi
,a w asherman ; dha
UM ? do d iljam
’-i , f. ease of bin
, a w asherw om an . It
l ld da li l, f. argu ment, proof. adb iim
,f' noise
,tum u lt . I‘
f" ) dam
,m . breath
,life . 19 w
ith”
‘
d/zydn , rn . m ind,thought . 3
r.) dam
,f. tail, end . p w h o d iydna t, f. conscience ,
we) din
,m . a day. s honesty
, piety ; diyc'
m a t-dci r,
Liv.) dung/d, f. th e w orld , people . a honest,j u st. a
J.) do , a . tw o . p u n
i.
" da ibi,f. fate , by chance . 3
lj d daw ii , f. m edicine , a rem edy . a d i diir,view ing, see ing . p
dw dr,m . a door
,a gate . 8
JJJ der, f. a long tim e
,late . p
my ’ dfidfi; m . m ilk. 8um .) des, m . cou ntry, region . 3
”a ditr
,f. d istance ; distant . p (,n deb/ma a to see , eXpe
Ulb o a . to cau se to run, rience . s
to drive . 3 Li d dend, a . to give , grant . s
da u yna,n . to ru n . 3 J
n .) d i nc'
ir,m . th e nam e ofacoin ,
Li a m-DO dost, m . a friend , lover ; a du cat. a
dost-rakhna,to hold dear
,to J
ima.) d indc'
ir,faithfu l , tru e . p
love . p [sh ip. p jlfi d d i w dr, f. a w all . p [ence . p
oh
) ” dosti , f. affection,friend v
ii i" di w dn , m . a hall o f au di
d iasra , th e second,other,
next . 3
dos/i , m . fau lt,defect . s
uK)° ditkdn, f. a shop . p
M y ) dau la t, f. riches, fortu ne , emlpire ; da u lat-mand, a . w ealthy . a
fly ) orL975" dono or doumi , th e
tw o,bo th . it
was. ) dharm,
m . virtue ; d/iarma'
v a tci r, incarnation or personi
isl dark,f. a tooth . b
lii ddrh'
i,f. a heard. 3
l.) diilnd, a . to throw dow n , topou r o u t, to ru sh forth ; db l-d,a . to throw aw ay . it
$313 ddnd, m . retaliation ; an oar
a stick ; ddnd - l,to take re
venge . s
88
be
li bfi du bcimi , a . to cau se to sink . It
gi gsdu b/ti , f. a dip, dive ; dabk
‘
i
mci rnci , to bathe . b32
J .) dar,m . fear.
DJSdarnc
'
i,n . to fear. 3 [bridle Ii
La llgj'g d uriyci - I, a . to lead by th e
li lJlfi da lw ci nci , a . to cau se to bethrow n, placed . it
diibmi,n . to sink,
dro w ned . b
to be
L553 doIi , f a plain kind of litteror sedan . It
dond i , f. a proclamation . it
LJ l d/zamp na , a . to cover u p,
conceal . Itlsgufs dbdncbd
,m .
frame w ork . It
dbab, m . m ode, m anner. b
dbo l, m . a drum ; dbo lak,
a little drum . ll
Lagging db i mdbnci,
a . to seek,
to search for. s
a frame ,
lingderd, m . a dw elling, a tent ;a . squ int-eyed . It
Jag d i l,m . di I-dau l,
siz e and shape ; deI, a clod . b
stature
(:i sti rra , m . an atom,a little ;
th e least b it. a
gikr, m . rem emb rance ; gikr-k,
to m ention,to praise . a
i
J
l rat, f. night . 3
raJa or l raJa , a king. 3
i i)
J'lJraz
,m . a secret, a mystery . p
n lJ mi le/2nd, to keep, stop . 3
Jrdm- cbera
'
, a nam e fre
qu ently given to slaves. s
l rdlzat, f qu iet, ease . a
alJ n i b , f. road, w ay. p
cg?J ru tba,m . rank
,dignity . a
ratb, m . f. a chariot (four
w heeled). s
L5jJ rati , f. a w eight of abou te ight barley-corns. 3
m s,ruLJLsa t, f. leav e,disch arge ;
ruMsa t-b,to depart . a
a s.
Jrafl ma , 1n . rent
,hole . 1)
LJ
rassci , m . a rope . It
Jrisiinci , a . to be enraged . b
rasta,m . a road
, w ay,m ode . p
L590rassi , f. a string, cord . p
J a eJ ras/zk, m . envy,jealou sy p
‘
5Jraf
'
k m . a friend,ally . a A
MJru le
’
a , m . a letter, note . a
L§J
rakh na, a . to place , possess,
save ; rakb - d,to pu t dow n , to
place ; rakh - I, to establish . 3
liljéJ rakb w dnd
,a . to cau se to be
placed
,or pu t. 3
NJ rand i, a w oman . It
rang , m . colou r, pleasu re . p
rangin , colou red, gau dy . J)
JJ Til, m . face,su rface . 1)
JJ ?) Jritbarit
,in th e presence ;
face to face,before . p
la'JJrup a , m . silver. 3
ard rup iyd, m . a rupee . 3
L553J roti , f. bread, a loaf. s
(31mi ll , f. sou l, spirit. a
JW ‘
)rc
'
ij mandir, m . a palace . 8J
‘
jJro z
,m . a day. 17.
( 20 )
li lj-s“
,gajw zgnzi , a . to cau se to be samri n, like , sim ilar. s
fitted, prepared . 3 sag“
samajb , f. comprehension . s
6“w eb , m . tru th , tru e . 3 L45 4 “
samajbnd, a . to compreu fi “
sakLtt, hard, severe, very . phend , u nderstand . 3
saklti, generou s, liberal . a u )
“ smaran,m . rem embrance
,
sada, alw ays. 3 [fa].
recollectron . b
“54 “
samay, m . time , season . 3sudau l, w ell sh a ed, racep g
su nana , a . to cau se to hear. 8J“ m . th e head, th e top. s
extol . b w Samp at f W ealth . 3
sandesa,m . a m essage . 8
sansar,m . th e w orld . 3
singau ti , f. an ornament ofgold , &c . on th e horn o f a
b uHock . 3
L3 .. su nnd,a . to hear. s
Ll .a sara/zna,a . topraise,
0L”. sarci e ,f.a carav ansary,h ou se .p
g ab-a sard i , f. coldness, cold w eather. p [region . 1)
sar- z amin,f. empire ,
lJ-i saz a'
,f. pu nishm ent . p
u s . 3 t 1i
d!218 aZY) I e 17so , correlat. pron . that Very
,
that sam e sau,a h undred . b
siw ci, except, b esides. a
susti,f. laz iness
,dilatoriness.p
C’
J d lxw sa’
ci dat,f. felicity ; sa ’
ci da t
mand-i, gratitu de, felicity . a
JlJ
.» sa w dr,a rider, one m ounted
safar, a j ou rney, voyage . p or ridin go O ,
4 31“ safed , safa id, Whi te ' P n Ja sa w ari
,f. riding, equ ipage .p
saknci , 11 . to be ab le . 3saw dl
,m . request begging ,
J osi e . S ikandar, 111 . Alexander. p petition . a
C
kin sikbci (silcsb ci ), a lectu re . 3Lid)“ sw dmi , m . master, h u s
embarked . p
li lei .» si/cbci nci , band . a
sik/z ldnd,a . to teach . S
J lJ.» siw ci e,same as siw d. a
Jlfi i .» sukb -
pdl, m . a kind of socbnci , to consider, reflect. s
sedan . 3 lo,» saudci
,m . a bargain , pu r
Sikfiak (siltsbak), a chase . p
teacher, preacher. s u dbgar, m . a m erch ant. p
(Ala sa lcim, salu tation ; hail ! a sau ddgari , f. m erchanu a w lla sa lcimat, f. safety, safely . a diz e
,trade . p
su ltan , m . a sovereign ; Ar. JJSr» sit-dau l, elegant, w ell
pl. sa liiti n , sovere igns: a shaped . s
sa l i lca , m . skill,taste . a
Co
b)“ sirrbLh , m . a hole,cavity . p
f“ samm , m . poison . a [ings. s
z i
t/0d saraj, m . th e su n . 8
Jl samac/zdr, 111. ne w s, tid Sardci s, name o fa poe t. 11.
r)“
lat e) » saump nc'
z,a . to deliver over,
consign . Also samip nc'
z . 8
U)“ 30nd, m . gold sand, void,empty . 3
U,» sonc
’
z,n . to sleep, -to die . is
li ly santé, m . a pestle . Ia
w eir: sori/fifi ,
in front . kM? " sakc
'
irc'
i , m . aid, assistance . 3
fl ?“ su basra , a thou sand . 3
M L» :siydsat, f. pu nishment . a
siyc'
inc'
z,w ise
,inte lligent . s
alga siyc'
i/z,black , u nfortunate . p
last .» si dhé, straight, opposite . s
a
j ,» ser
,a certain w e ight, nearly
tw o pounds. kLei ,» si lt/1nd, a . to learn . 3
senknc’
z,
a . to parch , to
w arm one ’
s self. 12
si ng, m . a horn . s
A
U .
Jain sbdlcfi , a branch , horn . p
all: SILL-
l b , m . a king, prince ; Sli t-
ift
z dda , a royal son ,a prince . p
Al l!» shag/ad , possibly, probab ly,perhaps. p
sbabd, m . a voice , sou nd . 3
u sizabi h , f. a pictu re , likeness. a
GM sh itc'
zl fi, f. qu ickness, haste ;qu ickly . 1)
sh ntu r, m a camel . pv
s ls ‘i‘s/nga
’
a t, f. bravery . a
uaési’ sh aggy , m . a person , individu al . a
w as. sh idda t, f. violence , force,adversi ty, affliction . a.
c
‘“
lof
t: sbart, f. condition, stipu lation ,w agers a
skarm,f. bashfu lness, m o
desty, sham e Shaw n- 5725, n . to
feel asham ed . p
sizarmandagi , f. bashfu lness, sham e . p
skarmanda,
abashed . p
asham ed ,
ash urz
'
t’
,f. beginning, com
m encem ent. a Zi asizafi r
, viciou s, w icked . a
sh afalca t, f. kindness,1“Q, I
affection . a.
JKA
siz ikc'
ir, m . hu nting, prey . p
sh ikari , relating tohu nting ;m . a fow ler, hu nter. p
1L“
. s/zu kr,m . thanks
, gratitude . (1
“Ki t: sImkI, f. shape , figu re . a
r“ski/cam
, m . th e be lly . p
”i t; sitar
,m . cry, noise , d istu rb
ance . p
573: slzau lc, m . desire
,love . a
uéf o slzauki n , desirou s ; amateur,fanciers. a
Api a sh a/1d, m . honey . p
I t‘s slza lzr
,m . a city . p
2503-1421 sba lzz c'
zda,a prince sizab
i d i,a princess. p
sh er,m .
'
a tiger, a lion . p
d agskzrzn z
, f. sw eetness, eloence . p
sh igra , qu ickly . 3
u°
w ia gdfiib , m . a , lord,master
,
companion , possessedi
o f, as,
gdlzib-Zglj ma , th e m aster of th e
hou se ,S
‘akib i pos
sessed of chastity . a
sdf, clean, clear, candid . a
,
éé su b/z
,f. m orning, daw n . a
I“ sabr, f. patience, endu rance . a
sakba t, f. society . a
m i l/o sarriz'
f, m . a banker,a m o
ney-changer. a
“If
,sirj, m erely, only. a
g lib safd fi, pu rity, beau ty . a
w sifa t, f. praise, qu ality . a
(lie sa ldlz, f. cou nsel, advice . a
l>lLa saldlzagz , peaceab ly, adv is
ably, by w ay of advice . a
ab ox,atrunk . a
g iro =razw c
'
ib, m . rectitude , a v ir
taou s action,su ccess. a.
aer
a sw at,f. form
, face . a
M ga id,f. game , hu nting, chase . a
u“
expedi ent . a
z a’if, frail, bedridden . a
L
all: m . a shelf, a recess. a
M “: télca t, f. pow er, endu rance . a
bl: tab
’
, m . constitu tion,natu re . a
“ A: Iab’
i b,m . a physician, doc
tor. a
(lo taralz , f. m anner, m ode . a
J}b tarz , m . m ake , shape . a
cJ/l: tarafl f. side
,direction , ex
trem ity. a
lab ta’
dm ,m . food, victuals. a
la
Ujfjmllé ga
’
ih ir-k, a. to manifest,
display . a It
A22
clinic tifli , f. infancy . a
ga lab, f. search , demand,
su mm oning, pay ; {a la b-k,to
seek for, to send for. a
tA lo tam
’
,f. avarice
, greediness. a
”la £au r, m . m ode, m anner. a
m . a storm of w indand rain . a
Lh is: £511, 111 . length . a
gaw i la , m . a tether, footband taw ela , a stab le, stal l . a
1’
aj z z 7, f. w eakness, helplessness. a
9 13i: &ki l, w ise , a sage . a
l: ’
c"
z lam,m . th e w orld
, u niverse ;’dIam-
p an&h , th e asylum of th e
u niverse, h is m aj esty . a
Hi:’ZiIim,
a . learned, know ing. a
4 g “ ’aj a,ib, m . w onders, c u
riosities. a
u rns“ ’
ajab, m . w onder, adm iration ; a. w onderfu l , rare . a
ab s“
a . w onderfu l,a strange
th ing . a
) &c Mgr, m . excuse . a
Us}:
’arg
,f. represen tation , a pc
tition,requ est. a
Jig)
:’a z i z , preciou s, dear ; u sed
su bstantively , like th e Frenchm on cher, ’ my dear friend .
’
a
’isIzm t, enj oyment . a
00
c a l. 24
instantly ; of a Jl§ kar
,m . u se
,b u siness, service,
verity . a
00
d
JAB Zec'
zbiI,fit
, w orthy . a
ledai,m . a judge . a
lcc'
imat, f. b u lk, heigh ,t
siz e . a
lcabsa , m . grasp,possession . a
(cabal, m . consent, [cabal-k,
to agree , accept . a
leu tI, m . slaughter, killing. a
AS lcadd, m . statu re,siz e . a
(each ,f. w orth, price . a
PAS Icadam
, m . foot,footstep . a
rm: Ifad
'
m ancient , o ld . a
on, rest. a
[cars dend,
j ): karar
U5} kar§ , 1n . a
to lend . a
ltasam,f. anoath kism,
kind,
spemes. a
” a s least-
Ir, m . w ant, fau lt . (1
JG [rag ga/g, m . a robber; henceCossack .
ka z dkdr,by chance . a p
M leag ia , m . a qu arrel . a
24 5°
kil’
a,m . a fort, palace . (1
w k? [cine-
fa t,f. contentm ent . a
J) ? Ica u I, m . a statement , a w ord . 0.
M L: Iciyfimat, f. th e general resu rrection, calam ity . a
fra id , f. fetter, imprisonment . a
w 112mm,f. price, value . a
katib, m . a w riter. a
LilSka tmz , a . to c ut. 8
w ork, deed . p
LSfi JK kZZr-ci mbi , embroidered
cloth . p
3.5Kkdg i w g, m . paper, a scrap of
paper. p
15Kkdfir
,m . infidel. a
Jigkc'
iI, m . tim e . 3
(Ag kam , m . bu s1ness, u se, de
sire ; kam arm, to be u sefu l, of
service . 3 p
L,l lai n
,m . th e ear. 3
kdmpnc'
z , n . to tremb le , to
sh iver. s
LM JM[rand/122, m . th e shou lder. 3
49K [rank/1, th e armpit . h
f ji ylg kdrihkfibja , th e c ity of
Kanoj. s
fi lg‘
kdyat/z , m . name of a casteofHindus, a scribe, a copyist. 3
J kab, w hen ? 3
kabi,m. a poe t. 3
kabll t-
I,
ever, some time or
other ; kabh z‘
r occasionally ; ku bh i , sam e as
[cab/z it . s
ljékapg‘
c
’
z,m . cloth , clothes. 3
w) ; kup ti t, u nfilial . s
lag ku ttii, m . a dog. 3
ug lzskitdb, f. a book , w riting. a
haskitnd, h o w mu ch ? h o w m any? 3
dif f ku tw c’
il,an officer ofpolice . 3
guy/$5 Icatori , f. a smallme tal cup . 11.
+31; ku ch lz , any, some, some th ing ,
a little ; kackh u , any, th e least . It
kackch lefi’
fi, m . a tortoise . s
L5
U b“l S kirde lent
-
z or kin-
re mangf
w iinEi , to geton h ire , to borrow . ll
if K risbn
,th e god Krishna. S
U; karné,a . to do , to place . 3
adj/SkTOdft, angry, w roth . 3
VJ Iris, inflect. of la w n, w h o ?
frequ ently j oined to th e following w ord
,as kis- Iam fi; h o w ?
Iris-w aste, or J ig/3 , w hy? it
d kasbflaprostitu te ,c o u‘
rtesan .a
Icasnii , a . to draw,cover. 71
GA o r
rg leis? o r kisa, inflection
of 1103 or ku c lalz, som e,certain
,
any. 71
$4 25 Iris/ct, m . f. a sow n field . p
unis kish t
'
i,f. a b oat, ship . p
35 Ita l, to-m orrow ,yesterday . 8
(lg
ka lci m,m . a w ord, speech . a
ka lc’
iw ant, m . a m instrel,
m u sician . ll
m tg/{a lgam t h e liv en cou rage . h
ffkam,deficient , less, little , rarely ;u sed in composition , as kam
bakl gt, ill-starred, a rascal . 1)JM kumdl
, m . perfection , excellence u sed adjectively
,as
, ex
trem e , th e u tmost, &c . a
li laS Icamdnc'
z,a . to earn one ’
s
living. It
ijd kamaj
'ii (cam era), m . a room,
cham ber. (Port )kami na ,
b ase,m ean fellow . p
295 kim
'
zm ,m . shore, side, lim it . a
(S ig kunj i , f. a key. 3
M kund,m . a cistern, basin . 3
kanga l, poor, w retched . it
L5:5 kane, near, b eside . 12
if Ica u w ii , m . a crow ; ku ,a , a
w ell, a draw -w ell . h
gb bjg [rota/u ,
sm allness, defi
c iency. p [of police . p
«Alf ; kotw c’
z l,m . th e ch ief officer
tag/"53
; kotbr’
i,f. a room . 3
diff-
jg kite/1a
,m . a lane
,a street . 19
if; kog‘d
,m . a w h ip, a lash . I:
Lia ; koma l, soft, w eak . 3
u ; kau n , w h o ? w hich ? w hat ? Itkund i
,f. a m ortar. II
ka unsfi,w hat-like ? of w hat
sort b‘
S kL511
o z , any, som e one
or an,a certain (person , s
6 M, that, thu s, as follow s ; som e
artic . a
tim es a relative , w h o ? w h ich ?1)Léka lzfz , m . b idding, order; Isa/1514
su n'
z'
,f. altercation . s
dlef kin-
11,f. skin
,h ide . s
ulé ka lz iifi
,w here ? w h ither? It
{3q M i me-
1, a . to eat,su ffer ; m
food , d inner. 3
u gh; ka lzaw at, f. a byw ord, a
[rub . s
Mis tf kh ujlci nc'
z, a . to' tickle,to
ins/é kh aralzé, m . a hare . s
ljé Ic/zag'd, erect, standing . It
L955 kh irki’
,f. a w indow . it
Liékbu lna, n . to b e Opened, toclear up after rain .
ls
bllékb i land, a . to give to eat“
,to
,
feed . 3
bile?Jagklzi I to laugh‘
. it
saying . 3
n d
26
hé kaknfz, a . to tell, say, b id, L535; gujarc
’
zfi ,b elonging to
call, affirm . s Guj erat . b [a fool . 3
UK; klzo lnc'
i, a . to open , u n tie, let Us.» grad/121, m . an ass, (m etaph .
loose . s V’Af gu darya , a shepherd . it
kkonfi,a . to lose
,to w aste . 3 i V»
gag/1 1 a , m . passing. p
klzet, m . a field . 3 5A) gugaranna, a . to forw ard . 13
L54 5 k/zefi ,f. hu sbandry
, emp . 8 Lb gu z arnc’
i , n . to pass. p
Jigsk/zel, m . play, gam e, Sport . 3 gur, m . a preceptor. 8
L135 kkelnfi, n . to play, to sport . 3 dfgard, f. du st, Scottice,‘
stou r.
’
p
M kabbfi,som ew h ere , anyw h ere, prep . arou nd . p
som ew hat . s irddb, m . a gu lph , w h irlL
y
s ié kfieiicl mci or klza zn cfinii, a. pool. pto delineate , draw . 71 f. th e neck . p
L553 0 1
’ ka ’e) some , a few . 5roj
f
garm,hot ; garm
'
i , f. heat, h otL5 kyc
'
i, pro . w hat ? h o w ? w hy
? season . p
w he ther (or not) ; kyc'
z 1311516, gar/1 m . a fortress, palace . It
‘Ehow gloriou s ! w hat fun ! 8
,Z-iéf guftgu conversation I)
done, a deed , past part. b is/
oa u l
,m . a rose ; gu I Ifarna , to
of karnc’
i, to do, m ake . 8 extingu ish . pLASka isci , h ow ? in w hat manner?
1.SKga li , f a lane 12
o f w hat sort ? w hat like ? 3
l”; gum lost . p
kaifiyat, f. natu re, state . (1
6; £9l guman karna, a . to
u jtg kyu n , kyau n, w h y ? h ow
? imagine , fancy , opine . p 11w ell ? w hat ? kyini ki’ b ecau se ;
u; gu n , m . sk ill ; gu ni , skilfu l . s
kyz'
ni-kar, h OW? k
alzf gu nc'
zlz, m . fau lt , crime , sin . 1)
i fUljgz zfgunt/zw éné, a. to cau se to
b e fixed (as a string). 3
jif
f
gm iw dr, m . a villager, a
peasant . laf. a chariot
,cart . 11
1.9Kga ll , f. abu se . 3
b lfgana, a . to Sn 8 A; gazed/1, a w itness ; ga w c
’
z izi'
,
,efijls gangb , a knot ; gfinffi I“? evidence , testimony . 1)
PW “:very “Ch 7‘ Jig; Gop c
'
il, one of th e names ofj lfgc
'
niw ,m . a village . 3 Krishna. s
Jig/gc
'
iw ,f. a co w . p ”
(gor, m . th e grave , tomb . p
gap slzap , ch it-chat, w figosb t, m . flesh . p
conversation . It {ff gok/c, m . a portico . I:
i“28 1
Lal Zamba, long, tall. h id e m iingné, a .
’ to ask for,to
Lg langra, lame . p it b eg. 3 [agree to . s00
L3) lu fna , ,a. to rob , plu nder ; h i ke mZinnZi , a . to believe, ob ey,
lotnfi, to roll on th e grou nd . 3
fish ma 1 f. mother. s
5) lu ka, m . spark, flame 8 mu bfim k, go od , au 8piciou s ;6 9 105; m people 3 mu bfirak-béd i
,congratu lation . a
f a fox. S u , » and b e ma t and ma té, f.
f a slave . 72 m ind,j u dgment . 3
lofifi , b l°°d °
w ma t,don ’t (u sed w ith im
lafit l letm’
z, n . to repose , to lie it
dOW H 74 [carry 3
th e ma tc
’
i’
,m . goods, property . a
716, a . to take aw ay, toJa e mitr, a friend . 3
ug lekin
,conJ.b u t
,yet, how ever. ad w omw dsadd i ,an accou ntant a
F o mu ta ajjib astonished . a
d eg lek/zak, m . a w riter
,one
w h o is w riting . 3
Li ll.) [I la-
pi lé, b lu e and yellow ;applied to th e appearance of th e
Ja m M atlz urii
,name ofa province
and tow n near Agra . 3
L434 mufifi
,f. th e fist, a handfu l . 3
LS?“ mz tfi
,f. earth
,du st . 3
Jim maga l
,f. a fab le
,sim ile , pro
buy. 3verb . a [v ention . a
{Aliye for th e sake of. la ” Lg
" majlis, f. an assembly , conUL?
“o maclzana, a . to m ake , st1r
eyes ofa person enraged . 3
h ad 16 726, a . to - take , accept, set,
‘
u p, comm it . 72la: 7716, f. a m other ; mc
’
z bir’
p ,
parents. 3”i
s" maizrfim,
d isappointed , exmc
'
zjarii, m . state , c ircum cluded . a
stance,incident . a [kill. 3 M afimz
‘
rd,a m an ’
s nam e . a
mar-délnc'
i , a . to sm ite , to w as” milmat, f. labou r, m isfor
a fj lm mc'
irg, m . a road, path . 3 tune . a [rions. a
Ujlm mfirnc
‘
z,a . to sm ite
,strike . 3 s i b le.
” mu ljfita lif, different, v a
g jto more
, by reason ‘
of, in con w M mudda t, f. a space of time,sequ enc e -of. s [goods a a long time . a
dim mai l, ,m . property, w ealth
,lam mu dd
’
ii, no . desire , w ish . a
Cfilb mfi lik,m . m aster
,lord
, mudda’
i,m . a plaintiff,
possessor. a [d istressed p claimant. a [degrees a
JANA: ménda , left beh ind , tired , $ 310 marfitib, m . (ph ) steps,
‘f
d lj
o marc'
id,f. desire, m eaning,
inference . a
(1c martaba,m . a step, d ignity,
office,tim e ; eh martabe, once
u pon a tim e . a
ry fmarlz irmfleceasedsh e late . a
of mard
,m . amale,aman , a hero ;
mardc‘
m a -miir, like a m an . p‘
marg z,f. w 1sh
,1nc11nat10 11 . p
if : margé, m . a fow l, b ird . p
“14 marnfi
,n . to die , to expire ;
also mar-jam}, th e sam e . 3
musfifir, m . a traveller. a
ply .“ mustz
‘
l l, m . a m ast . a
As “ masjid , f. a mosqu e . a
maskl zam,a j ester. a
til/S. “ muskurana, n . to sm ile . it
ubdm M usa lmiin , a Mu h amma
dan,ofth e faith ofM uhammad . a
mask/c,f. a leathern bag
for w ater. p [know n . a
w ell
km m u sfilz ib, m . a compa4 D
mon ,friend
,a lde-de-carnp. a
noted ,maslc,b ur,
”c anmu sau w ir
,m . a painter. a
w mag oa i,f. calam ity
,atflic
tion . a [to . a
n‘aw magabile, prep. conform ab le
“ it“ ma glab,m . a qu estion
, pu r
eanmg. a
M ugafi r-Man (p.
a man ’
s name . a
b ik e mu’
c
'
zf, ab solved, forgiven ,excu sed ; mu ’
éf learnt—z, , to for
give . a
z w , ,exc 11sed exc usab le a
( 2 9 )
fl.“ mu
’
a llim,111 . a teach er
,doctor. a
”has ma ’
lz'
mz,kno w n
, apparent ;ma
’
lum- lz,to seem ,
to appear. a
Law mu’
ammc’
i , m . an enigma, anacrostic . a
ma’
yz’
rb,blameable, dis
repu table . a
” Jim mag itrz
'
lr, a . proud , fastidions. a
c a b s maft, free , gratis. p
muflis, poor, w retched . a
fluke muflisi , f. poverty . or
W mufl d, profitab le, u sefu l . at
fo li o malcc
'
im,m . place, occasion a
”i n mu lcarrar, assu redly . a
UK” makan, m . aplace ,dw elling . a
«i n muklc, m . m ou th . 3
cei e makklz z , a fly . it
JZo magar, bu t, except . 3
Gumbo mu lalcat, f. m eeting, iaterv ie w . a
mu lk,m . a cou ntry , king
dom ; ma lik, a king ; (pl . Ar.)malz
'
rk,kings. a
bi o ma lnc'
i,a . to ru b , to tread on ,
to anoint . 11lala mi lnr
'
i , n . to be fou nd, to meet . ‘
3
croman
,m . th e m ind , sou l . s ; nam e
of a certain w e ight, a m au nd . p
g ala.» mam—15d}
, f. proclam ation .
'
a
w hist o mu nta/ch abét,selections,
extracts. (1
lg.“ mandé, open, exposed . hmanjlzofi ,
f. a small
it
ufizw manish , f. d ignity, rank. p
A.
W mamas/z , a person . s
ohu mantik, m . log ic . a
mangilgz , m . logician . a
t.
“ man’
,m . proh ib ition . a
mangw finc’
i,a . to cau se to
be brought. itM mmib
, m . th e m ou th, face ;mmi/z
yo mil
, a hair. p
Giff motZ
,m . a pearl. s
Ufa mo tZZ, gross, coarse . h
L5 11
”a mark, 111 . a fool . 3
ref mau szm or ma usam,
m . time,
season . a
GJ/éyo mau/gfif, depending on ;
maukfif 1r, to conclu de,to stOp. a
Llama mom dil, soft- hea1 ted . p
lag)” mand/z it,m . a footstool. 11
um? " malzabal
'
, pow erfu l . s
a rich m erchant . sJ‘
w kpo ma/zado l, a large sedan . b
Eti) ” ma/zariij, great king ! sir!
[skilL a
1.0/n mabc
'
ira t,f. proficiency,
sire s
Wl
mufim,m . th e thigh bone
(Ex. 1)
W mah ina, m . a m onth . 1)
aul-3 4 °miyén , amaster, gentlem an . p
415134 m iyc'
ina , m . a palki . pI ,
» mi r, m . a ch ief, a leader. p
Ly e mini , lord , he ir. p
1 34 1 mir bakfisbi , m . th e
paymaster general. p
[marnfz). s
ly e mini,dead
, (past part . of
v i i i/w mu w éfi lc, a . conformab le . a
>w moc/fi,m .a cobb ler,saddler. ll
30
i) mirz é, a nob le, grandee . p
j‘
y o mez , f. a table . p
fie muyassar, a . attained , attainab le . a
lif e ma i la , a . dirty
,defiled meld,
a fair ; melii th elfi, m . a crow dof people . s
”(are mefih , m . rain , rainy season . 3
R U né- okh,
w orthless, u se
less. p
02
s mi le/111372,displeased . p
L,JlQUnfidfin, a . ignorant, simple . 1)
L5i lt nfidc
’
ini,f. ignorance . p
lSUm'
zkii,m . a lane , avenu e . k
b Unc'
iga urc'
i, m . a kind of bu l
lock (ofth e country Nagaur). 11left? nc
'
z suddenly, u nexpectedly. p [tation . p
USUnl isb , f. complaint, lam eng
a llsnfilz’
sfii , complaining, a complainant. p
ufilUmi l/Ci , f. a sort of sedan forprinces, &c . 71
AUn ii la ,m . w eeping, lam entation .p
(A) nc
'
zm , n1 . name , fame , repu tation . 8
ms‘U nfi-malzram,
unprivileged ,applied to su ch m ales as are no t
entitled to visit th e harem . a
dleUnémard, numan ly, a cow ard .p
J ojoUnamurd i , f. u nmanliness. p
0 7 43namus,m . f. l1onou r,dignity,
th e female part of a fam ily . a
,3Unfiviw ,
m . name . 8
J) ”
ni clze, b eneath , close u nder. I:w )
w in , infiect. plur. of w u h , h e,
nesiz,m . sting p
nek, good , virtu ou s nek-s
baMt,of good disposition . p
neh , love, affection . s
J
ma or 0 conj . and, b u t. a p
Un u A m l, w ap as
-d or - k,a .
to re tu rn, give back . it p
w fijib, right, proper. a
1.3l u'
r
'
irid,arrived ; w c
'
irid-h , toarr1v e . a
db l} waste, prep. on accou nt of,
i i
for th e sake of, b ecau se . a
Ee l} m . a preacher. a
ga
'
i l) w filci
“
z' verily, in tru th . a
w i) w élcif, aw are , acqu ainted . a
l l)
w ale—1, a term ination added toth e inflected infinitive denotesth e agen t ; added to nou ns itdenotes th e ow ner, w earer, &c . 11
w a z i r,a m inister, cou nsellor;
w az ir- z fid i , th e dau ghter of a
w a z ir. a
lag, w a
’
s, m . a discou rse , serm on . a
w a -
g fiaira , et cetera, and so
forth . a
b i o, w a§f, m . praise, encom i um ,
virtu e, w orth . a
uh) w atan, m . native cou ntry,hom e , ab ode . a
U}w afe
'
z , f. perform ing a prom ise ,sincerity, fidelity . a
w a le) w a let, m . time, season, op
portim ity. a'
sh e , &c . it
w e)” w aft/1m, that instant . It8)w all , pro . h e , sh e , that, it. 11
who)
h
Us)w all? or w u/fi, pro . h e h imself,
that very (person or thing). 71cat-T
b)w u lzifi, imm ediately . it
H5) w e, they, those ; plu . of w u h . la
Lg, w a isfi, in that manner, so , likethat
,su ch as that . 11
b
fi lm[ni t/t , m . th e hand , a cub it . s
6 935 [rat/17, m . an elephant. 3
12191» bai t, f. a m arket . It
Ute
/As bar-man, despairing, help
less.
uh ’ 115172
, yes, even so . h
4 33i» Ira—1nd}, f. a pot. s [sigh . It
g lb li t—w ,
alas ! lzc'
i,e
-k,to groan ,
kiti'
r, a friend . 3
Jags: m . a w eapon , offen
m . j olt,j olting. I).
710 41413, f. a bone . 3
I“lzar, each , every . p
if ” h am-
z , a . green , fresh , verdant . 3
bare/7c, pro . every one . p h
A1? )b bareband, h ow m u ch soever,
how soever, althou gh . p
jJJ J ‘Q’ bar- ro z,ad . every day. 1)
jimh argiz , ad . ever.1)
U)" l u
'
ran , m . a stag,
a deer. s
jlj
’
b h az iir,a thou sand . p
(be haz l, m'
. j est, j oke . a
g“
JUL.» basin/[tr (same as boslzyér),carefu l . p
gj lj’
mw Iaaft-lzaz fifi ,a com
m ander of seven thou sand . p
$ 5311:i
fialc’
zkat, f. ru in,destru o
tion . a [tion . h
Ulla»lti lénc'
z,a. to m ove , set in m o
h lmki lniim. to mo ve orbemoved . it
Klm Ita l/1:6, light, not heavy . I:
(b 1mm, w e plu . ofma ifi. 3
re bam,
a particle denoting together,
”u sed in composition, as,
L2) ? (to kamjo lz
'
, a compam on . p
gel/«b ham
-rai d, m . a companion,fellow - traveller. p
33cs
’.
Ui? ,Jb h o n . to become . 1:
Jim,» kaskyfir, inte lligent, attentive , cau tiou s. p
Uj» bond, 11 . to be , become, grow . 3
112 (an emphat ic particle}0°
even, indeed , v ery . I1 f"
mmam,even, indeed . I:
wasMn , void of, w ithou t . 3
Lb b ig/ii , m . m ind , sense . 3
Uyé, conj . or, e ither. 3
d igyc'
id, f. m emory, recollection . p
)Uyc
'
ir,m . a friend, lover. p
I“;fit h am-
’
umr,companion, of w yalr
'
z'
n, m . certainty, certain,th e same age . p
c ., -ti c classM kamesh a , alw ays, ever, perpetu ally. 1)
A3.»H ind, India. p
JAzmH indu, a H indu , one w h o fol
low s th e faith of B rahma . p
with)“ H i ndfistc
'
in, m . India. a p
J” h unar, m . art, skill, virtu e ;bu narmand, skilfu l . ph afisnc
'
i, n . to sm ile . s
Aeolian hangc'
ima, m ,
an assemb ly,tum u lt
,assau lt .
sj)
J ,» hash , m . sense, perception . p
51>ha w r’
i,f. w ind, air. a
[fellow . p
bam-maktu b,
true . a
Cfigyak, one , a, an . p
UK.»yagc'
mfi, kindred, single, incomparable . p [ner. It
u p.mm, oryori, thu s, in th is man
M y, yfil fifi, thu s, even so . 1:
A61. yifi, this ; h e, sh e , &c . it
ult
’. gabr
’
in, here , u sed w ith th eth e ge
nitive (inflec .) to denotepossession, &c .,
as mere yabc'
iri,
in my possession ; apu d me . k
yih'
z'
,this sam e . 11
“fp s; yahifi , here, in this veryplace . 12
c g. ye,they , these . 11
A FEW NOTES AND OB SER VAT IONS,
On tfiose p arts of tile R eading Lessons w kiclz may app ear less
obv ious to a beg inner w ith references to th e Grammar.
Th e first numb er follow ing th e letter G. denotes th e page of th e Grammar to
w hich th e reader is referred ; th e second num b er or letter refers to th e
paragraph in that page.
Extracts in tbc P ersian Character.
Extract 1 .—J a ld i kc
'
z p fia l, th e fru it of rashness ; th e genitive placed first, G . 95. 64. It w ill b e ob served that th e sen
tences are arranged according to th e ru le , G . 93 . 62, eachsentence finishing w ith th e verb hai , is.
’Gungi z aban, &c .
,
‘
a Speechless tongu e is better than a lying tongu e : in th issentence there are tw o clau ses ; th e verb hai is expressed at th e
end of th e first clau se, and consequ ently u nnecessary at th e end
of th e second . G . 135.
Ex . 2 .
—Tfiog‘ ii kin
—ma, little eating th e infinitive u sed sub
stantiv ely, G . 129 . a . ; galab kar’
i lm lro, seek for know ledgeta lab Icarnii
,a nom inal verb , G . 66
,last line here th e verb , con
trary to th e general u sage, comes first . There are in th isExtract a few more exceptions to th e general ru le as to arrangement, agreeab ly to w hat w e have stated, G . 93 . 0 .
Ex . 3 .
—J alne laga,‘
began to bu rn ; senkne laga,‘
beganto w arm h imself
,
’ G. 13 1 . c . thatkol ne kaha , a j ester said , ’or by a j ester w as said ; ja le, b urns
,
’
tap e, w arms himself, ’th e aori st for th e present, G . 122 . 6.
Ex . 4 .
—Th e sentences in this Extract follow th e general ru leas to arrangement, w h ich is, to commence w ith th e nom inative or
agent, and end w ith th e verb , th e remainder or complement ofth e sentence being included in th e m iddle . bar pa, literally,on foot ; ’
z iyiida fi rariib hain,
are more w icked ; th e com
parativ e degree , G . 7 1. b .
36 Notes, &c .
Ex . 14 .
—Ek no u n me nse, one o f them jii iye and baitbiye,respec tfu l forms of th e imperative , G . 123 . cl .
Ex . 15.
—P ab le, in th e first place ; Iarko nIre sikh liine Ice
I iye, for the pu rpose of th e instru cting of boys (or children) ;ki jiske mu w afi lc cha len,
‘ in conformity w ith w h ich they may
m ove (or w alk) ; th e particle ki is frequ ently u sed before th erelativejo , &c .
,in im itation of a Persian constru ction , G . 117 . 0 .
Ex . 16 .
—Ap u i angiith i , th ine ow n ring,’ G . 112 ; ya'
d learnt-
z
(tujb Ito u nderstood), th e infinitive u sed imperativ ely, like th eLatin gerund , G . 129 . a .
Ex . 17 .
—B ill i as tbi , pluperfect tense , G . 127 . d . bujlzci do,exting u ish ,’ intensive verb p ara p ara, &c . , all th e t ime ly ingdow n , h e continu ed giving answ ers.
’
Ex . 18.
-Agar main ba z i na jam ,
‘if I do not w in th e
game ; ser bbar gosh t,‘an exact pou nd of flesh th e ser is
nearly tw o English pou nds tariisb le, c ut off ; u sne namiina,
h e did not (or w ou ld not) agree ; [Casi p as (for kasi Ire pas),near th e ju dge elcser se eh rati z iyiida , a single grain morethan one ser.
’
Ex . 19 .
—’Ain kil’e Ice ni cbe close u nder th e very palace ; ’
littii gayii,‘w as plundered ,’ passive voice ; M idmat men,
‘ inth e presence ; ’
ars ki , made representation ,’ Iri , fem . of h iya,
agrees w ith ’arg
, bu t’arg h iya is also u sed as a nom inal verb,
G . 66. IV. cb irag lz , &c . , under th e lamp is darkness, ’ a pro
verb analogou s to ou r o w n saying , th e nearer th e chu rch th efarther from God .
’
Ex . 20.
—Anjiin bokar, as a stranger kyii maj/l e, &c .,
‘ doyou not recogniz e me ? ’
kya, here u sed as a sign of interrogation,G . 93 . b .
Ex . 2 1.
—Us-ke ; yabiin is here u nderstood ; mar-gayc'
z and
biirit-Ii and u rii d i,all intensive verb s, G . 65 . 44 . 1 .
Ex . 22 .
—Admiyon Ito i sgabal menjiine detti , h e allow ed th epeople to go into th e stable,
’ G . 13 1 . c . ; p birtii and kartci ,
continu ative past tenses, G . 124. b. apna ham kar- Iiyii,‘
gainedh is ow n obj ect . ’
Notes, 636 . 37
Ex. 23 .
—A§n5e riib men, in th e midst of th e w ay cb irc'
igfll
ghar Ice-
z, &c .,I did not pu t o u t th e lamp of th e h ou se before I ‘
came aw ay,’ literally, I hav e not come (after) having pu t ou t, ’&c . ae ga ,e, you have com e and gone ; ’
jiltii na glzisii bogr'
i,
‘
.m u st not you r shoes have been w orn ? ’
Ex . 24.
—I s w ai t, at present ko, u nderstood , G . 100. a .
bonge and na—den, &c . , th e plu ral u sed ou t of respect to th eDoctor, G . 118. 7 8 ; jo u nbon ne, &c . , even shou ld h is w or
sh ip have g iven th e m edicine biindb ii—karegii, frequ entativeverb , G . 66. I I I . 1 ; marnr
'
z bar [talc]; hai, death is destined .
’
Ex . 25.
—Tabiib bokar,‘
being in distress ; ’
p arkci ne, tomake read,’ to teach cau sal form ofparbnii , G . 62 . 43 Iete
lele Iii , even w hen lying dow n th e repetition of th e conju nc
tive participle denotes a continu ation of th e state , or repetitionof th e action
,denoted by th e verb ; be b iitb p ri nw ke kilt
'
ie,
w ithou t th e m oving of h is hands and feet b i liiyii, th e pre
terite participle , u sed as a sub stantive , G .
Ex . 26.
—Su b Ire [taw ii le ki ,‘h e gave into th e charge of each
kc'
it dali , cu t off th e intensive of kiitnii .Ex . 27 .
—D onori lai g'
i Ice prisga,in, aur i nsaf 0715715, G. 104. d . ;
eh ek, one to each,
’G . 106. c . ; larka
'
t asko sup u rd'
h iya”
,G .
101 . c . ; in a m ore recent edition of th e w ork from w h ich th isextract is taken
,th e reading is Iarke ko use, &c .
, w h ich is m u chbetter.
Ex . 28.
—Clai mrot'
i se, w ith six loaves th e term ination on
denoting th e plural om itted, G . 107 . 7 0 ; w u b ddl-dene men
ddldgil bai, that amou nts to throw ing it aw ay .
’
Ex . 29 .
—M rs kigii (a nom inal verb), h e represented ; arg
ki is also u sed in th e sam e sense , vide Ex . 19 ; dar- [i updst
karnii , to make requ est do saw al bejii (properly do sa w iiI- i
beja), tw o improperreque sts.
’
Ex . 30.
—Likhni th in,
w ere to be w ritten,’ G . 83 dam kbao o o o o o o
raba, an 1d10mat1c expression, denoti ng h e remamed qu i teg
sflent,’lIt. contmu ed devou ring h 1s breath .
’
Ex .
- D eklme w ale, th e spectators,’ G . 66 ; dilsre Ice
38 Notes, &c .
glzar (ko understood), to th e hou se of theotheri
samjhd, &c . ,
h e perce ived that it w as not a screen ‘
; fareb kkdyd , w ere de
ce ived, ’ lit. experienced deceptio n .
’
Ex . 32 .
—S i kbne kd, &c . , w hy then mention th e learning of‘
it ?’i tne men,
‘ in th e m eantime bar bdd ki , hav e cast aw ay .
’
Ex .
—D uslzndm d i tbi , plu perfect tense, G . 127 . d . dtb
dtb dno, &c . , you share b etw een. you each e igh t dnds it w ill
b e observed that sixteen duds make a rup z .
Ex. 34.
—Gardan mdrnd,‘ to decapi tate mere rd ba rd
,
l erdo o t o
bard ka lij a bat, thou hast great courage ; ’ Ja w an -mard i,
t l
h er0 1sm’or courage dar gugra , h e passed over (or passed
by) h is fau lt .’
Ex . 3 5.
—Ek bard salgbj ,a very generou s man
, G . 107 . b .
i n my presence ; mardana w ar, h ke a m an or hero ;
Ex . 36 .
—Kbabr karnd, th e infinitive u sed as an imperative .
Ex . 37 .
—E arle b ile, vide G . 13 1, 84 ; w djib tar,Persian
comparative, by add ing tar to th e positive .
Ex . 38.
—B ditkd diyd, intensive of baitkdnd bard, in th elast line m eans greater,
’m ore important . ’
Ex . 37 .
—B ard mom-di l,‘ very soft-hearted in miydn ki
,
of th is reverend gentleman plural u sed ou t of respect ; ap udis here u sed for merd, G . 113 . e .
Ex . 40.
—K u ch b gol gol sa,‘som ething qu ite rou nd .
’
Ex . 4 l .
—Su bb bo le bi ,‘ imm ediately it w as daw n of day ;
’
kaun si jins, w hat sort of comm odity, ’ G . ; i t ddndi p ar,
notw ithstanding so m u ch w isdom gibi fakag, this only andno m ore ; ma in bdz dyd, &c .
,I w ill have noth ing to do w ith
su ch w isdom past u sed for th e fu ture, G . 126. a .
Ex. 42 .
—J o w u h beg“ mi le
,
‘
if that (lost) sheep shou ld befou nd kh udd ki rdh p ar,
‘in charity, ’ pou r l’amourde Dieu ; ’Mudd ki kasam (kbdtd b un) I sw ear by God .
’
Ex . 43 .
—Admi ke, &c .,
taller than a man ’
s stature kh an
p abu nckne tak, &c ., by (th e time of) th e letter
’
s arrival, th e(w heat) season h ad expired ’
i tibdr kijdw e, can be credited .
’
40 Notes,
The extract from th e Ardish—i-M akfi l (p. 26) is here for th efirst time correctly printed . In th e Cal cu tta edition
,th e printers
m isplaced th e letter-press of tw o pages, so that, w h ile th e pagingseems perfect, th e text makes nonsense . Several years ago I
d iscovered this w hen endeavou ring to make sense of th e passageas it h as all along stood in Mr. Shakespear
’
s Selections, v ol . I .
p . 105 . Mr. S. h as endeavoured to cement th e matter by throwing in a few connecting w ords of h is ow n, w h ich do mend th em atter. A strict critic w ou ld have stated th e fact
, so that th eoriginal au thor shou ld not incu r blam e for th e sins of th e B engalprinters, or of th e English editor.
Th e subj ect of th e extract is a description of a k ind of chariotdraw n by b u llocks comm on in th e province of Guj erat, moreespec ially in th e c ity of Ahm edabad . An accou nt of th e
same , accompanied by a beau tifu l engraving, w ill be found inth e Travels ofAlbert Mandelslo , w h o visited th e Spot upw ards oftw o hu ndred years ago . Th e edition of h is travels to w h ich Iallu de is th e folio printed at Leyden , 17 19, page 74 .
B efore th e stu dent attempt th is extract, it w ou ld be w ell if h e
thoroughly revised w hat h e h as already done . He ought alsoto peruse th e Grammar from th e beginning u p to th e end of th e
Syntax . Lastly, h e m ay, w h ile so doing, greatly facilitate h isfu tu re progress by bestow ing a few w eeks on th e study of
Persian .
Printed by J . & H . COX, B nornsns, 74 a 75, G reatQueen Street,Linco ln
’s- Inn Fields.
7 , LEADENHALL STR EET,M AR CH 1846 .
W ORKS ON INDIA,
PUBLISHED BY
H. ALLEN AND
7 LEADENHALL STR EET .
In 6 Vols. 8yo . cloth lettered . P rice £ 4 168 .
A H I S T O R Y
BRITISH EMPIRE IN INDIA .
B Y EDW ARD T H O RNT ON, Esa .
Illustrated by Maps, shew ing th e possessions of th e East-India Company at v arious
This w o rk is b rought dow n to th e close of Lo rd Ellenborou gh ’s Administration .
Mr. Thornton ism aster of a style of grea t pe rsp icu ity and v igour, always in teresting, and frequentlyrising into e loquence . H i s power o f painting characte r, and of bring ing befo re th e eye of th e reade r thev ents wh ich h e re lates
,is rem arkab le and if th e know ledge of Ind ia can b e m ade popular
,w e shoul
say, h is is th e pen to effect it —s es.
Mr. Thornton ’
s h isto ry is comprehensiv e in its plan,c lear and forc ib le in its style , and impartial in
its tone. -w 6 .
A sound, an im partial , and a search ing composition ; chaste , elegant, and flowing in diction , profoundin thought, and tho rough ly logica l in reason ing.
”—Colon zal M agaz zn e.
Th is e legantly and faithful ly penned h istory . —Tau n ton Cou r ier .
Popular in its sty le,com prehensiv e in its deta i ls, and just in its estimate of ev ents. ”—Salop z‘an
Jou rn a l .“
,Th e earnestness of style sheds a pecul iar charm ov er th e narrativ e, wh ich is as p ictorial and am
mate d as a romance .
”—Atlas.
Th e style of th e work is free, rap id, and sp ir ited,and b ears marks of a thorough fam il iarity w ith th e
subject. Ev e ry Engl ishman ought to b e acquainted With th e H istory of th e B ritish Em p ire in Ind ia,and w e therefo re co rdi al ly recommend th is work to our readers. —Pa trzot.
Mr. Thornton thinks soundly , and h as studied Indian affa irs deeply ; h e is serious, industrious, andinten t upon h is task ,
and to al l appearances impartial : h is sty l e of composition is p lain b u t luc idconc ise.
”-J ou rn al of Commerce.
Th e writer e v inces d il igence and research into orig inal authorities ; h is sty le is easy, and th e intrinsicinterest of th e im portant ev ents of Ind ian h isto ry is thus increased by a popular and amusing narrati v e .
”
—E dm bu rgk E oenmg Coarant.
Th e write r i s we l l acquainted with h is subject, and handles it in a m asterly m anne r . _ Lz°
v erp ool
Ch ron icle.
GAZ ETTEER OF THE PUNJAB , S INDE, &c .
A G A Z E T T E E R
THE COUNTRIES ADJACENT TO IND IA ON THE NORTH-WEST.
INCLUD INGSINDE
, AFGHANISTAN,B ELOOCHISTAN
T H E P u N J A B ,AND THE NEIGHBOURING STATES.
Compiled by authority of th e Honou rable Cou rt ofD irecto rs of th e East-India Company ,and chiefly from documents in their possession .
B Y EDWARD THORNTON, ESQ. ,
AUTHOR on THE B RITISH EMPIRE IN IND IA.
2 v ols. 8v o . cloth , 253 .
Mr. Thornton is an e legant and judic ious writer, and w ith imm ense labour and great tact, h e h asc ol lected, from v ario us sources
,e v ery sort of informa tion o f th e least in terest or importan ce connectedW ith th e countries adjacent to Ind ia on th e north -west. ”—J ersey s es.
W e g iv e a cord ia l we lcom e to th is comprehensiv e and usefu l work , wh ich h as long been a deside ratum ,
and w e thank Mr. Thornton for th e sp irited and am ple manner in wh ich h e h as suppl ied th e defic iency .Th e work is in v aluab le.
” Un ited Serv zce Gaz ette.
STOCQUELER’
S HA N D -B O O K.
HAND - B OOK OF IND IA
A GUIDE TO THE STRANGER AND TRAVELLER, AND A COMPAN IONTO THE RESIDENT .
B Y J. H . STOCQUELER , Eso . ,
LATE ED ITOR OFuTH E CALCUT
’
I‘A ENGLISHMAN.
Second Edition . Post 8v o . cloth lettered , 14s.
This publication emb races, in a condensed fo rm , complete and accu rate informationrespecting th e Topography, Climate , Gov ernment, Comm erce, Law s, Institutions, and
P rodu cts of India ; th e Manners and Customs of th e Inhabitants ; th e method of trav elling th roughou t th e Empire and th e expense attendant thereon ; th e condition of th e
E u ropean (English) Society ; th e Ru les and Regu lations of th e v arious b ranches of th eExecu tiv e ; th e cost and manner,of p roceeding to India ; th e Sports, Ceremonies, andPageants common to th e Country, &c . &c.
Th ere can b e no hesitation in say ing that th e plan and execution o f th is Hand-B ook are equal lye xce l lent that it is th e most com p lete and accurate Vade -Mecum wh ich h as yet appeared, and cannot
fa i l to b e both in teresting and useful to a ll those whom b u smess or pleasure may send to India.
”—F r iendof I nd ia, p u b l ish ed at Seramp ore .
W e can safe l y recomm end th is G uide,
’as one wh ich w il l im part a correct notion of all those parts
of th e contin ent of B ri tish Ind ia wh ich are th e princ ipal places of reso rt o f Engl ishmen proceeding fromth is country to ente r th e serv ice of Gov ernment, or embark in commerc ial
,agricultura l, or other pur
su its.
”- Atlas.
Th is is trul y an excel lent b ook. "—Li‘terary Gaz ette .
THE W ELLESLEY DESPATCHES .
DESPATCHES, M INUTES, AND COR R ESPONDENCEOF THE
MARQUESS W ELLESLEY, K . G
During h isAdministration in India.
Rev ised by h isLordship . Fiv e large v ols. 8v o . w ith Portrait,Maps, Plans, &c.cloth , £ 6 103 .
A publ ication of extraordinary interest. —E d z'nb u rgh R ev iew .
I t is now general ly adm itted, that h ad not th e splendid talents of th e MarquessWe llesley b een cal ledinto activ e exerc ise at th e cri tical conju i i ctu re o f h is Lo rdsh ip ’
s assum ing th e go v e rnment, th e necessityfor discussing Indian affairs wou l d long since hav e ceased. Th e issue of th e contest w ith T i ppoo Sul tanuw as a tr iumphant proof o f th e po l itical sagac ity. energy, and , abo v e all , th e m oral courage, th e pecul iarcharacteristic of Lo rd W el lesley
’s h igh ly-g ifted m ind. ”—Asz'a tzc J ou rn a l .
THE PAR SEES ’ JOURNAL.
JOURNAL OF A RESIDENCE
TWO YEARS AND A HALF IN GREAT BRITAIN .
B y JEHANGEE R NOW R OJEE AND H I R J E E B H OY ME R W ANJ E E , o r BOM B AY .
Post 8v o . cloth, 123 .An extrao rdinary production.
- T2mes.
A H ISTOR Y OF INDIAF R OM 1600 TO 1835 .
B y PETE R AUB ER, ESQ. ,
Late Secretary to th e Honou rable East India Company.2 large v ols. 8v o . £ 1 13.
cannot fai l to present matter of interest to all,b u t espec ially to th e Ind ian reade r.
R AMBLES IN CEYLON.
By LIEUTENANT DE BUTTS, H .M .
’s GI ST REGIMENT .
Post 8v o . cloth ,As pretty a v o lum e for l ight read ing as any inte ll igent person would w ish to take up . —Nav al and
M i l i tary Gaz ette .
NAR R ATIVE OF A JOURNEYFROM
HERAUT TO KH IVA, MOSCOW , AND ST. PETERSBURGH , DURING THE
LATE RUSSIAN INVASION OF KH IVA ; W ITH SOME ACCOUNT OFTHE COURT OF KH IVA, AND THE KINGDOM OF KHAUR ISM .
B Y CAPTAIN JAMES ABBOTT,BEN GAL AR T ILLE R Y .
W ith Map. 2 v ols. 8v o . cloth , lettered , £ 1 43
T w o h igh l y interesting v o lum es.—Asz’a tz‘c Jo u rnal.
Th e deta i ls of h is m ission are so no v e l and interesting, that it is imposmb le for them to lose the irinterest W ith th e B ritish publ ic .
”-t erary Ga z ette .
BENNETT’S CEYLON.
CEYLON AND ITS CAPAB ILITIES .
AN ACCOUNT OF ITS NATURAL RESOURCES, INDIGENOUS PRODUCTIONS,AND COMMERCIAL FACILITIES, TO W H ICH ARE ADDED ,DETAILS OF ITS STATISTICS, W ITH MAP
AND COLOURED ILLUSTRATIONS.
J . W . BENNETT , Esa .,LATE CEYLON CI V I L ESTAB LI SHM ENT.
Royal 4to . cloth lettered, £ 3 33 .
W e are sure that our readers w i l l deriv e much am usement and information from th e perusal of th isv o lume .
” —s es.
M ISS EMMA RO BERTS .
NOTES OF AN OVER LAND JOUR NEYTHR OUGH FRANCE AND EGYPT TO B OMBAY,
W ITH REMARKS UPON ADEN AMD BOMBAY.
By th e late MISS EMMA ROB ERTS , w ith a Memoir of th e Au thoress.Post 8v o . cloth, 108. 6d.
SCENES AND CHARACTER I STI CS OF H INDOSTAN,
W ITH SKETCHES OF ANGLO - INDIAN SOCIETY.
By Mi ss EMMA ROB ERTSSecond Edition . 2 v ols. post 8v o, cloth , 18s.
Few w orks in light literatu re hav e met w ith so great. a popularity, or hav e been so
u nanimously recommended by th e press, as TH E SCENE S AND CHARACTERISTICS OFH INDOSTAN .
”Th e sterling character of this book w as fixed w hen a special thanks of
th e Royal Asiatic Society w ere v oted to Miss Robe rts for its publication .
Mass R oberts’ p ictures are all drawn With great sp irit and accuracy,and remarkab le for th e truth
of the i r co louring.—Quarterly R ev iew .
CUSTOMS OF THE MUSSULMANS OF INDIA.
B y JAFFUR SHUR R EEF,
A NAT IVE OF T H E D E CCAN ,
Composed u nder th e Direction of, and translated by C . A. HE R R LOTTS, M D. , Su rgeonon th e Madras Establishment.
In one v ol. 8v o . , 168 . c loth boards, lettered.
W ESTERN EMPIR E.
HISTORY OF THE WESTERN EMPIR E,
FROM ITS RESTORATION BY CHARLEMAGNE TO THE ACCESSIONOF CHARLES V.
B Y THE HON. SIR ROBERT COMYN, LATE CH I E F JUST ICE . MADR As.
2 v ols. 8v o . cloth , £ 1 103 .
ALLEN’S MAPS OF INDIA,&c .
A0
NEW LY-CONSTR UCTED AND IMPR OVED
M A P OF I N D I A ;INCLUD ING
THE PUNJAB AND S IKH STATES ;Compiled chiefly from Su rv eys execu ted by O rder of th e Honou rable East IndiaCompany. 1845.
On six sheets, size 5ft. 3in. w ide, by 5ft. 4ih . highOn cloth , in a case
O r, w ith rollers and v arnished
M A P OF I N D I A,
FROM THE MOST R ECENT AUTHORITIES. 1846.
On tw o sheets, size 2ft. mm. w ide, by 3ft. 3m. highOn cloth , in a case
O r, W ith rollers andYariiish ed
A SKETCH MAP
OF THE
PUNJAB AND SIKH TERRITORY;Shew ing th e Tract of Cou ntry annexed to th e British Possessions by th e late Pro
clamation of th e Gov erno r-General of India.
On one sheetO r , on cloth , in a case.
M A P OF AFFGHANI STAN
THE ADJACENT COUNTR IES.
Compiled from th e latest Su rv eys of these Countries, by th e Officers attached to th eIndian Army ; and pub lished by Au thority of th e Honou rableCou rt of D irecto rs of th e East India Company.
On one sheet, size 2ft. 3 ln. w ide,by 2ft. 8ia . high
On cloth , in a case
O r, w ith roller and v arnished
Pu blished immediately on th e arriv al of th e Marsei lles p ortion ofeach Ov erland Desp atch .
Thirty-tw o closely printed pages, price l s. stamped ,
ALLEN’
S INDIAN MAILAND
R EGISTER OF INTELLIGENCE
FROMf‘
B R I T I S H AN D F O R E I GN I N D I A, C H I N A
,
AND
ALL PARTS © IF" THE EAST.
This Paper contains th e fu llest and most au thentic repo rts on all important occu rrenees in th e cou ntries to w hich it is dev oted, compiled chiefly from pri v ate and
exclusiv e sou rces it h as been p ronounced by th e p ress, in general, to b e ind isp ensab leto all those w h o hav e friends or relativ es in th e East, as affo rding th e only correctinfo rmation regarding th e Serv ices, Mov ements of T roops, Shipping, and all ev ents of
domestic and indiv idual interest.A SUMMARY AND R EVIEW OF EASTERN NEWS ;
GOVERNM ENT GENERAL ORDERS , AND COURTS MARTIAL ;APPOINTMENTS . FURLOUGH S , &c .
, CIV IL, MILITARY, AND ECCLE SIASTICAL, UNDERTH E HEAD OF E ACH P R ES IDENCY ;
DOMESTIC INTE LLIGENCE—B IRTHS , MARRIAGE S , AND DEATH S ;ARRIVALS AND DEPA RTURES OF SH IPS AND PA SSENGERS ;STATE or TH E MARKETS , IND IAN SECURITIES , &c . , &c .
HOME INTELLIGENCE RELATING TO INDIA ;
ORIG INAL ARTICLE SAPPOINTMENTS , CA SUALTIE S , ARR IVALS , DEPARTURES , EXTENS ION OF FURLOUGHS,
AND !ALL AFFA IRS CONNECTED W ITH IND IA AND THE SERV ICES .
Throughou t th e INDIAN MAIL an u niform system of arrangement prev ails ; th eAppointments, &c. , are placed alphabetically, and at th e end of each year AN INDEx isfu rn ished (gratu itously) , to enable Subsc ribers to bind up th e v o lume, w hich fo rms a
complete Asiatic Annu al Register and Library of Reference.
THI S B OOK I S DUB ON THE LAST DATESTAMZPED B ELOW
AN INI TIAL FINE OF 2 5 CENTSW ILL B E AS S ES S ED FO R FA ILUR E TO R ETUR N
TH IS B O O K O N THE DATE DUE. TH E PENALTYW ILL INC R EAS E TO 5 0 C ENTS ON THE FOUR THDAY AND TO ON THE S EVENTH DAY
OVER DUE.
